Home

HP 662x Series Service

Contents

1.
2.
3. Figure 6 4 Output 3 amp 4 Board Component Location 6 15 P302B 4 P3028 1 P302B 3 P302B 2 P302A 1 P302A 2 P302A 3 060 7 1
4. Q gt e csza 8594 m cz bo 23540 404 e FsSI o 23920 8409 e RZ93 o odczziL e HERSE HUR 405 334 344 6410 R406 0 580 0 R396 0 L R379 HCR 8598 9 o 83780 CR334 0 e C369 06 E CR334 0 9 95 23840 o o 20 in o jo o N R Rz4 O o ES O medo 0 z i o 2 23270 RZ27L6 pe R318 O 6 R381 0 O 4Rz8i O O Rz87 o 28530 B G 2 3567 REA 6 R510 0 R385 Lo HRS 8372 5 J 1 J G RZ67 R408 a 98367 0000000000000 956 9 9 a Ouss4 U338 o 26 e es Qd 2576 N o 9999 gt Q4 L301 Lo z S oler Tas G4 F303 a m Jag Lo c361 L302 Le BELL 9184009 G U 5 x eos C360 R399 0 O a 6564 CR361 O GiRsijO 320 9 67160 o b O F304 Fo CR3260 Raggio 964810 9 J 5 BER
5. PZ0ZA 1 BIEN RATE CURRENT SOURCES R382 P304A 1 BA HV CONNS W CLIPS 4 SHORT HIDE R379 lt R377 P303B 1 FROM DIO BR 495 5 130 P304B 1 TO HYBRID 1 4 50 DC C360 361 P303A 2 lt C359 P304A 2 lt 4 0 1 L 4000 309 7200 250 C377 R523 HV CONNS em HV PURCH L305 L304 MI 10K P303B 2 LU ONLY 02946 w NU 5 P304B 2 509 HU9100 UH 35U 1744 1540 HU9140 HU ONLY 3 1160 opea O 220 RIS B000H C378 R524 JE K 20A R371 51205 0562 MED RAIL R521 R520 R522 F524 10 0 1 5X NU 68 1 47 5 PS03585 5 PNE ZEE S oe 1744 HU069 4 359 ty dk 20766 B FETE 4099 LU ONLY HU ONLY HU ONLY R304575 SHORT WIDE 5 FROM FROM DIO r CR363 5 128 DC 4 I 0335 ZA EE 1 c363 R386 a POHER MODULE 2 2200PF 1 1K 4 HIGH RAIL EMITTER 250V 15000 15000 5 MED RAIL BYPASS 4 J 350 35 2 cae HUPURCHx LUPURCH 00264 13 LOM RAIL COLLECTOR SEE NOTE P303A 5 F306 7400 7400 3 9K 5 34 BASE DRIVE OUTPUT 10 SAAS O OG Meso 63 639 2u 5 DRIVE QUT SENSE 5 LOW RAI 77 0v BIAS THERM 5 HU CONNS OU GATE COMMON P303B 5 HOSTED R375 C365 HU0811 Seance 0766 C364 3752 BA 75000 W EEE
6. gt 00 TERM 1 2 SHUNT AMP 6509 Toss DAC 0 TO 10V 10 P O 550 0540 757 0280 143 CL LOOP R440 9 TK R487 SENSE 33K WY P70 Tei 4 R438 Ax R441 R443 R444 750 5x AAA AAA AAA NW SAALE a335 15U 14 7 1K 1 1K 1 35 65 RE A nr OO 150 R442 1 CU CL CONTROL 1 5M C431 8 25K CR348 HU0252 0199 SENSE PROTECT CIRCUIT 3 114 5 2 R446 520PF 21 5K 6 U REF 1 1000 0546 gt 0 1 2 fa 15 8K R483 SENSE 1 3 74 NZCR349 79 1744 CR350 R439 HV0683 2225 ON OFF R435 1K 2 2K 5 174W R512 1N645 0393 R456 2K C392 330 C434 TT3300PF gt 5 7015 HU __ 12 276342 a04 1M 99 gt gt 0737 UK qE 00 TERM 1901604815 SHUNT 15 APR PK I S DRIUE 35 5 CU FEEDBACK 1048 CU CL CONTRO R445 CR351 Ut L UOLTAGE LOOP 2 gt C414 CU LOOP 0UT TERM 68 R475 C407 HOOT ED R480 R482 SENSE 82K 5 100 SHUNT APE NAA C409 0 1 1744 1000 2 11 C412 15K 2 HU0698 6360 R476 HV0698 4493 09291 JEU 10K 1 T2 1 21M R488 5 95 1 HU0160 5410 500 P O R473 3300PF 500 R507 28 7K 4 7 u REF 1 R477 0351 mE HU 757 0460 28491 care 327 1 2 gt gt LWA ENG 4 C413 K oy 43K gt 1744 6800PF HU0698 3159 2 R478 6 _ 26 1K 022 0160552546 OUT TERM 26 1K 1 C4
7. z 5V 5V e 1 1 4 2 20 mo on ow ov ov og og 1205 2 298 LTR kos kos log 5 SELECTOR SLR LILL ALLE S lt F ALLE 45 5 See R239 1252 2493 1 P205 bes gt NTSB PES NCES ACES NCES NC KE SNES RY gt LxA Re Y EER LxN BxN x Zx N 0212 ANN CAL_LOCKOUT lt 8 lt 80 lt 8 SEN 8780 STN SEN SEN SEN SEN Sih D 0 7 1821 0300 19 C e 2 25 EES S903 SKIP_SELFTEST x Ne ERCONN CABLE EM luge 5 59 u A 2 SN SN SN SN SN SA pct 0699 1318 1 1252 2493 2 P205 GND 00 7 10 NT OT gt O 390 320 320 320 320 380 250 gt 6 0107 74ABT541 Less g x SA MODE 0 7 e RIBBON ses 585 585 585 585 SBS 585 ses 585 3 e s 3 4205 NL1251 5385 Go xe ale E 1252 2493 3 P205 5 i 14 popo S e lis 4 4005 1251 5385 z 101251 8105 6 U213 U210 U204 U206 U201 U281 u211 u207 u230 02 16 Yo 2 4 P205 5 06 A6 gt 4252 2493 4 DTS 2 12 6 15 5 1206 NETS 2 vs 5 n D4 14 ALE SDA g 11 s m 18 4 it 1252 2493 1 P206 DFS o N o 14174 NC 2 2 N x8 ae sH lt a J206 NL1
8. 2 OUT TERM 1 2 SHUNT AMP 6509 C433 CC DAC 0 TO 10U 10 P O 550 gt SS HU0257 0280 126 R440 1k R487 SENSE CL LOOP Rz e 9 C391 R432 R438 1 R441 R443 R444 A 750 5 AAA NN NAWY MASE 8511 HU9683 2225 220PF 28 7K 14 7K 1K 1 1K 1 2510 8 sx 2 2K Sx 1745 100U R442 1744 BRE R431 CU CL CONTROL 1 5M 8 25K AG Ta T Ir VM CR348 HU0257 0199 1800 1M R446 U REF 1 U341 00 P O TBi PAA R483 SENSE 15 8K 9 CR347 3 ANN CR350 R435 19555 HU0682 2225 5 4 ON OFF lt 2 2K 5 1744 R512 1N645 C393 230 C434 251 Hu 3300PF 12 ZN RSA 20d 0757 0780 4 60 OUT TERM 1N645 I SHUNT R418 15 NW PK I A CL LOOP 150K R420 DRIVE 4 35 5 FEEDBACK 1744 4 CR351 CU CL CONTROL VOLTAGE LOOP R445 4 2 ANN gt ek CU LOOP 0UT TERM C395 6800PF R475 0407 HU0160 5410 R480 R482 mm 7015 3300PF 504 82k 5 SHUNT 1005 40K 1x 4 75 1 18007 3 LEM E ARCE 412 7 9 TB1 R476 HU0698 4493 629 10K 1 5 25U 34 95K 1 HU0160 5410 3300PF 500 R473 15 4K K u REF 1 R477 Ss 2 0757 0460 R491 C410 1 2 ANN R474 R472 0413 619 22 43K ANd als 1 44 6B00PF HU0698 3159 2 R478 26 1K 500K baco OUT TERM 26 1K 10 5K Miec 1 C408 1 400U C411 3300PF 500 P O TB1 1 HU0160 6826 R481 o s Kr d 20470 01 2500 2556 0451 NGG 20 HU07520460 ZEE 24 3K As CL LOOP 195
9. CLO pin 10 The CLO current limit output output signal open collector takes on the state of the internal CC flip flop when STATUS SELECT pin 11 is Low The CC mode is indicated when CLO is Low Figure 4 19 shows the conditons that cause CLO to be Low CLO is open circuited when STATUS SELECT is High STATUS SELECT pin 11 This input signal when Low causes the four status conditions held in the flip flops as well as the overvoltage and overtemperature signals to be transferred to the six output pins on the data bus CVO CLO CLO UNREG OV and OT When STATUS SELECT is High the six output pins are open circuited MIN amp MAX PIN VOLTAGES ON A PROPERLY OPERATING BOARD mm tow Bias LOW AND HIGH LEVELS 5 POV DISABLE OV TRIP Common OV DRIVE STATUS RESET 15 V UNREG CLO STATUS SELECT OV OV SENSE THERM OT CL LOOP 7 00 V CLO CVO CL LOOP CV LOOP Common DELAY CAP OUTPUT ENABLE ON OFF PCLR BIAS TRIP 15 Input Input Input Bias Return Output Input Bias Status Output Status Output Input Status Output Status Input Status Input Status Output Status Input Bias Status Output Status Output Status Input Status Input Bias Return Time Delay Input Output Output Input Bias lt 0 10 mV lt 0 4 1 3 V 02 V 1 lt 0 4 0 4 V 0 4 V 0 4 V 2 6 V 0 4 V 25 V 0
10. test skipped test skipped test skipped test skipped test skipped test performed test performed this position error number 18 CAL LOCKED is generated if an attempt is made to turn on the calibration mode see Appendix A in the Operating Manual SIG ANALYSIS This position is used to perform signature analysis on the GPIB board for troubleshooting the GPIB board see para 4 23 SKIP SELF TEST This position causes the power supply to skip the power on self tests described in paragraph 4 15 This position allows the GPIB board to attempt to power on all output boards in the supply even if one or more output would not have passed self test Exercise care when using SKIP SELF TEST on a unit with output boards that are known to fail self test since the output may operate beyond its rated parameters The output voltage may even reach full scale voltage without being programmed 4 17 ERROR Codes and M essages Table 4 5 lists all of the error codes and messages that can occur when operating the supply Each code and the corresponding message if applicable are explained and a remedy or troubleshooting procedure is recommended This table is used in conjundion with Figure 4 6 and other troubleshooting flow charts provided in this section F301 301 F304 307 P303 ns gl A fame ae E E 14 Passes Figure 4 4 40W Left Hand Output Board Fuse and Test
11. FIRMWARE REVISIONS sss 1 2 Section II PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION INTRODUCTION a 2 1 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION 2 1 mins uum initio GPIB Board wa en snc t d aden ates Front Panel esasa L IS GPIB Board Figure 2 3 GPIB Interface 224 MEUM MR P I IEEE System MicroComputer Output Boards Front Panel Interface Bias Supply and Start Up OUTPUT BOARD Secondary Interface Circuits Figure 224 2 7 Power M esh and Control Circuits Fiqute2 5 t reet d e tede 2 10 Section III VERIFICATION INTRODUCTION roter irre 31 TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED 31 OPERATION VERIFICATION TESTS 3 1 PERFORMANCE 575 00 3 1 Introduction 3 1 Measurement Techniques 3 1 Constant Voltage CV Tests 3 4 Constant Current CC 3 10 EXTENDED TESTS esee 3 13 Output Drift Tests 3 13 TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT TC TESTS 3 14 Output Voltage and Readbauk Voltage TC 3 14 Output Current and Readback Current TC 3 15 Negative Current L
12. m 9 a e 5 9 52 Q4 e 891 80bu w BA 2 55650 8 O stra RE G CR33 e P3048 C3719 R396 0 P303A F308 jb F309 D wa 0000000000 m 8 21 qa 27000000000 NS Cy z 5252 OE eszo o le 0000000000 4 1000000000 ePB577 09 1000000 0000000000 lt 2 GJER30p 2 rooooooooo 192 2 ool oooooooooooooo 9 R S n gt 9 D rera Fe 2 0000000 0550550552553 OO 20000000 Lo 000000 ES g Fi s O M 57000 preo o essen Ie m 2255 EDTA Io
13. C296 CL TOGGLE poet C385 R421 90 6560 150 150K 100U R485 406 B d 0UT TERM 464 22 0PF ue SENSE 1 HU0699 1211 36 5K R462 pene 95K 1x 2 2 _5 10458 405 1800PF a 1000 ON OFF 1950 R484 35U 0160 4807 20K 4 R423 C387 R469 33PF 100U iik ANN t 100 01 20K 1x 159 U REF 1 1000 ee R458 20K 1 10K R466 2402 20K 4 7033 x 400U LU0160 6836 UO 01 2500 9342 2 0 5 9341 92110 0343 1 6506 p Sk R470 UR412 FET DOWNPROGRAMMER 1 smut TERM 20K TAM 8 1 1K 5 1744 C400 sqa S 14 HU0698 4536 DAC BUFFER e 22 g 340K 5200 HU ONLY R456 U REF 1 CL CONTROL 1000 LU0811 2553 1860 316 UENIT I 4 5 00160 48335 1744 4 ch Bec 1000 BLEED SINK I 4 C436 V BLEED CIRCUIT a ag HUPURCH 01535 CU DAC 0 TO 10V 2200PF 63U U READBACK 1 Figure 6 4 Output 3 8 4 Board Schematic Diagram sheet 3 of 4 CURRENT SOURCES R382 ANN P303A 1 lt 100K RR a R381 RZ80 2R379 2 R377 SU 5 232 169 495 5 lt 267 F304 C360 U336 3 Hu HU 1 022 2 0698 0698 3510 3510 1000 2 453 453 114 P30
14. esd Le e EE et sreg bo 00000000 0000 172 to 00000000000000 of o C303 fy jos 9 999 210000000 31000 b e m O am IESE Ekle Ig EI T g Free gt a T a 988 8 6 ordo 00000000 0000000000000 5 a s C AS By edo toso le ole octets i 5 m gt esase 6 21 Figure 6 5 Output 1 4 2 80W Board Component Location P302A 4 P302A 1 P302A 3 lt P302A 2 P302B 1 P302B 2 P302B 3 P302B 4 DC 0 7 I C600 15 CU DAC 0 TO 10U __ UREF A 100 ISOLATED 3MM 0 1 50 EE Mg Sr EM NPF 500 v R333 150 T CS1 na U313 19 5 pac 8 7 205 M 1510110 12 019 221018 5017 C320 6 016 SPINNE a 31015 AGND ISOLATED 3MM 1 DI4 5 NHS 50 CS 1230LCD 0 1 DGND 24 R327 R326 5 k ANN ANN 560 1 1K 1 1K C323 100 REF 1 DAC 0 TO 10U 120PF 1000 S 4 3 NHS 50 C329 MER 1 0514 i ISOLATED 3mm oA 500 17 opp pco 13 DBO RFB A 5 081 12 OU DAC 0 TO
15. no operation code freerun to the microprocessor data inputs The NOP code does not contain an address for the next instruction so the microprocessor goes to the next highest address Therefore the address bus 2 4 looks like a 16 bit counter that continuously rolls over and starts at zero The contents of each address appear sequentially on the data bus other side of the break In addition for all signature analysis tests jumper W201 must be moved from the NORM RUN position to the SIG ANALYSIS position see paragraph 4 23 2 13 Address Bus and Address Decoder The microprocessor has 16 address lines A 0 A 15 allowing it to address 65 536 locations The address decoder U 208 allows each addressable circuit to look at a shorter address The chip select signals CSO CS8 decoded from the higher order address lines 12 15 When a data buffer s CS is decoded it places its data on the data bus lines When a data latch s CS is decoded the output of each latch will be set to the logic state that is present on the associated data bus line If the chip select for the RAM random access memory ROM read only memory or talker listener chip is decoded the selected circuit will decode the lower order address bits supplied to it on the address bus 2 14 Memory ROM and RAM The system microcomputer contains both ROM U206 and RAM U207 devices The 16 K non volatile ROM contains the operating program and parame
16. rze m 81 ze m 2 gt Q225 U283 R228 4 0224 T U282 m si j E C210 Bi 232___ 0223 EG m __ Ba 8 0 EH _ 025 029 2 SH m 8 N RM ma Z E E hl 0222 0201 m un g w ms ll wa H ms ms Z w NH w f UU 12 e le mm pv W Eis u m e 1223 E_H C234 0213 6248 __ wos ECE 214 lt z z U209 R250 mum R234 a_i R25 mm BM gt 27 R252 mim gt R255 mm Z mn ER 5 0201 R225 R254 0281 R224 N N EX 5 This surface mount GPIB assembly applies to models starting with the following serial numbers and up 6621A 3737A03086 up 6622A 3736A04021 up 6623A 3736A05451 up 6624A 3735A13801 up 6627A 3735A02356 up Electrically and functionally this assembly differs somewhat from the previous GPIB assembly The surface mount GPIB assembly is no
17. 18 5 2M 24000 35 LU ONLY P303A 4 SHORT WIDE LV ONLY EYPURCHK 80404 FROM CONN IK 54 eM 27000 conns HYBRID 160 P303B 4 FERDE P304B 4 3 MED RAIL TE CR325 R373 pease HU1902 3323 ue zog HUO698 ON OFF Lu 28385 N7CR339 RZ8B 3156 2 5 gt 75 14645 14 7K C371 R396 18 20 ONLY 22 NNV 470 5 C276 R409 5 6 cz72 V EE Pr ELE CR362 Six L300 HU9100 5 UH 359 1744 HT ors 18804 ey 220UH 800UH R389 R402 R403 R401 6375 R410 R395 0 1 5x NU lt 68 1 410 10K 2 43 CR332 12 1K 1744 HV0698 4A 35U 5 7 HUB159 409 HU ONLY CR326 0005 139 LU ONLY HU ONLY CR333 8 y pU 10U 10K 6 0358 R393 R397 i JF lt i POWER MODULE 2 49K ANV 3 2 R407 R406 5 HIGH RATL EMITTER 07 7V 7V 475K 3 C369 4 5 470 Z N CR340 5 R353 5 1 MED RAIL BYPASS L306 5 sx 1N645 33 REF 2n 1 2 gt Poy DISABLE 330 T W 1059 z LOW RAIL COLLECTOR 8 SEE NOTE R411 RE PETE a gt 9 SENSE 1N645 14 BASE DRIVE OUTPUT R404 3 DRIVE 5 DRIVE OUT SENSE 5 ANN DU GATE 4 11100 BIAS THERM ZS 1 BK OU GATE COMMON SHORT WIDE TRACE 128 P70 5 por _ EA gt gt HERM i SHORT WIDE TRACE F303 SHORT WIDE 6 le ENGE STECK TRACE 128 DC 208 HV2110 0766 1205400 7 SHUNT gt PD 10M JIN 5 gt DRIVE SINK R405 3 C388 HP43 4 33K 3 gt FEEDBACK R400 C420 1sppp HU0160 4801 10K R490 1000 100 1000 lt 7
18. 5 and the control circuit 2 34 Power Mesh and Control Circuits Figure 2 5 The power mesh circuit in the upper half of Figure 2 5 converts the AC from the power transformer to regulated DC output power The primary power control element is the power module hybrid Note that the main difference between the 40W and 80W output boards is the 40W output boards have one power module U338 while the 80W output boards have two power modules U338 U339 connected in parallel The power mesh circuit generates a constant voltage or constant current output under control of the control circuits shown in the lower half of Figure 2 5 In addition to controlling the power mesh circuit the control circuits send measurement and status data back to the GPIB controller and or front panel via the interface circuits on the output board and the GPIB board 2 35 Rectifier and Filter These circuits consist of two full wave bridge rectifier circuits with filter capacitors connected across the rectifier outputs The proper ac voltage levels are applied to the rectifiers via secondary windings of chassis power transformer T1 see Figure 2 1 The rectifiers provide raw dc to the power module at three different levels high medium and low power rails The return line for the rectifier circuits is fuse protected If this fuse opens the power supply will fail self test all outputs will be disabled and the error message FUSE CH lt n gt will be displaye
19. edc4za e amo o s o D o m S opo 90 esse v mL fo ae Awe 950 5664 o m m R329 gt O ujo O tn 2 el R465L0 8 jo s Jo e O SSUB 01800 Blo z jo RS 003499 ol gt lo o ro d F309 P gt 83416 o o O 464 201959 eza 421 ME 5999 ef S 290 eEss4 o 9836270 20 4 R41 wH caos C301 9 LII 9 9 la R3630 o o 103510 RAG0 O 6 R4190 o o 984329 C412 6 D 9 p bol 25 o lo 4R335 0 o U327 o e cz4s lo OdC401 O 6 R448 0 a cz83 0 FM C406 Q D aloe Lo 6 9 463 003960 odR429Fo 01R4329 O 12556 x RA82Lo M olla e czeao Lo 9 355 R461 6 6 R450 0 ro LEHCR348 O ed 9 omm 6669 osko 2882 slee 3 381 a AIC OR e R44s o 6 R468 o N 2 R485 0 D gu 9 9 1 Ou B 23500 e c336 0 o opago EHS 0 58349 5 R489 Lo Sig s 218 2 166 0312 DHER343O o 4 eJ Fo TB1 m o 5 M 5 ET 9558872 CD T P301 o o o 6 o olf o O 97843076 0 92 9 R512 o gt D oc3i50 Ol omo OI 388 e son ne R375 Lo 0559 6 R418 0 edc4s4 9 e o o Plo ola jo
20. AAA P303A 1 lt 100K 5579 R381 2R380 R379 2 R377 HU CONN 3 232 169 495 5 lt gt 267 F304 C360 T HO 1 0698 0698 022 3510 3510 1000 10361 453 453 15000 P303A 2 lt 359 Hu P3038 2 PURCH 01546 HU CONN 8200 500 CR325 P303A 3 gt R388 P303B 3 gt 1200 HU CONN HS LU ONLY 5 220UH LU PURCH 01533 HU 1906 0255 HU0686 4725 1044 1 4 7K 5x 1 2W 10A HV2110 0685 ener RZ89 ZN 12K R405 CR361 33K C363 365 26386 P303A 4 lt J s um 2400 MM R402 L302 PurcHeoisa 8225 ia AA pA R387 p o 14 E 8 2K HU0698 3433 22 108 260005397 1728 28 7 HV9140 0238 350 499 0541 SCK HU2110 0685 BZUH FIN NX 13 HU CONN C364 L301 78 R375 R403 R409 560 mm ex 12000 URS90 0 HU ONLY 1 OHM 400UH ANN Temm 1724 SV HUB159 0005 0 15 ias nU R367 4s345 0 HV9140 1160 HU0 757 0442 HU2110 0685 HU0686 2225 PURCH 01545 R401 800UH 10K 2a 2 2K 5 172W 24000 16U HU1902 2223 0 i 0521 MED RAIL 42 2U LU ONLY 0338 IT e R406 POWER MODULE 4099 AAA 3 2 139 R410 470 5 CR329 C371 R396 HIGH RAIL EMITTER 1744 NN por 4 RAIL Bypass 5 2N4032 5 62K ZCR318 200 1 REF CR362 10K 5 6 8 HU ONLY 50 CR331 SW 15 LOH RAIL COLLECTOR c372 BASE DRIVE OUTPUT R407 1856 14 I DRIUE 007 SENSE T2200PF x 250 5 SW 9 Z 07 5 1089 CR332 11 OU GATE common E an 0416 HU0811 2252 25 10 1 8 NZCR324 a 18 54 Sou 500 HU0812 0010 3K 5x 3M
21. CR333 2298 g HV0180 3803 HU0160 6565 C420 6 8 750 1 0 100U PURCH fa 2 40PPM 250UAC BLEED SINK 70 475K 55 C369 1 2 DISABLE CR330 PU A AB 2 OU SENSE yaw Ody 0025 1009 R399 DRIVE W gt OU GATE id ZY 5445 R489 2 022 x FUSE STICK 2500 5 1 24 THERM 2 SHUNT 3 10M JTN DRIUE SINK PK 2 3 ON OFF FEEDBACK paag TB1 180PF 1000 HU0160 4801 NZCR545 gt SENSE R425 iy i 100PF 1000 00 TERM 392 2 3 D 509 EN CU CL CONTROL R433 R426 Pzo 3 52907 TERM Hv0757 0439 6 1 gt LSK Ka 2427 SENSE 10K 6 lt 3 gt CL CONTROL 14 12 499 3 gt 0U S HU0698 2444 R449 2 I O ALTERNATE PART 516 221 5 FOR R408 HV0698 3447 0U 548 442 CAM Po 18 Figure 6 3 Output 1 4 2 Board Schematic Diagram sheet 4 of 4 O P302A R440
22. YEL VIO FOR CABLE PART NUMBERS REFER TO CHASSIS CABLE LISTING IN TABLE 5 5 P70 WIS P O w12 WHT WHT WHT WHT WHT VIO FOR CABLE PART NUMBERS REFER TO CHASSIS CABLE LISTING IN FABLE 5 5 FOR 6627 THESE WIRES FRE SOLID NOT STRIPED 1 e VIO NOT HHT VIO 4 Schematic Notes For Figure 6 1 Fuse F1is 8A for 100 120 Vacinput or 4A for 220 240 Vac input Before connecting the supply to the power source check that the position of the line voltage selector card matches the nominal line voltage source 100 120 220 or 240 Vac See Section II in the Operating Manual Agilent Part No 5957 6377 for details The reference designators W1 W2 etc for the cable assemblies are for schematic reference only Use the Agilent part numbers to physically identify cables in the supply Each cable is marked with the appropriate Agilent Part No The illustration below shows the transformer 1 terminal designations The illustrations on pages 62 and 6 3 show the transformer T1 connections and cable part numbers for each model REAR VIEW 11D 12D 130 11C 12C 13C EM roves 11B 12B 13B IAS E PRIMARY 12A 13A m OUTPUT 14 N U 15 BOARD HP I a POWER BIAS OUTPUT BOARD POWER BOTTOM VIEW PP OOP 6B 9B 108 B 8B 240000 N U 60 SD 1 D 7D 8D The line module connections are shown below 6 4 TOP
23. jane 444 o iu oo o R386 Lo 46394 0 o D Ja oo o e bo 8 P eqczbjo EZ are 4 5 o o o o o o mO 1 o 0321 9 PA 2 8 30 5 oj a jo Q4 C413 Log C420 O o rapid BO O C363 o gt jo C D a q O O 39 Gl efezegbo 2301 o cazo 0 merse FIRE Je F30 6 R488 0 2 O U efrsoote 918496 CRIS 0 304 o CH G R420 0 01R491 0 997199 G R494 0 R495 0 CRz25 O G R399 G R485 0 o gt O1R4920 G R497 0 O O U334 oy 5 fex lo RS01 G R400 0 N we r jojo o jo 9 GIBZIATO 1300 p net F303 s G R520 G4R503 G C429 a Rz88 0 Qj L301 6 Q4 R376 FO 2516 B ol z 5 y H G R502 0 Gras Q4 R385 OTT Loo slo n on CR361 0 L302 sle 4 J5 eB 368 GH al R408 Lo ea 55 _ Soo oo tra C368 RZE o b 51553300 322 9558 10 CR31 954259 m G c439 0 CR32 2640 8044079 EY R31 CR324 0 e R323 R383 0 517 o O 7 are E o o olo Olo O 9515 O R o O DIO gt r R498 o 919 o 9 ejcze o o o 5 G R382 0 652
24. o o 965559 5 o o gt lo G R459 0 om o R47 19 d E 5 Vm Y 66 o oL D on GARE o u327 o o 485510 o oL2 ja R466 R508 86 999 e 2 6556 e dceoo e H C381 ho o o lo 9183499 4 o R462 o o eS D 259 e zzg o a czeglo RA o p e R462F o Jo 9 NONI S dd G RZ22 0 o 92552 lo o 9 350 ejps8ere I o o 2 lo Gd C410 ko mm Se 2 61032879 o o 432 O 3529 221 o R464L o caes bo 2 n O 9 19 9 553094 o b o 5 o eso ojRzei O p szlo 514 C409 bo Blulnlal gt 103309 0 00 of LH o 03460 18859 6 R461 0 22849815 c402 Fe LJ gt ooon 2308 o o 6 R458 0 oo 593 Fe o 2 Jo o 9 o o 63495 929 lo 91 496 9 nolo 9 gdlojolo 03114 lo 0324 o 2500 0 5 03418 fo u o c348 0 5 e ca4e2el o Solo lolo fo 2015000 0000 eo 02n o 5 gt e Lo 12 08346 alo 9 o j etsse a 5 re C3476 R 3606 esel 5 349 mdc405 Lo 1501 u 9 n o T o Rzegjo ol jo 91232669 o HH 655 9655210 01039909 18508 0
25. 14 0 14 14 14 po 14 14 0 14 0 14 p o 14 14 po 14 0 14 14 AAA AAA 3 4 1 3 D 0326 0326 0526 0326 0326 0326 0326 0326 0326 0326 0326 0326 0526 25 65K 0 URZ0S UNREG BIAS 20 0K S20 0k S20 0k S20 0k S20 0k S20 0K S20 0K S20 0K S20 0K S20 0K S20 0K S20 0k lt 20 0K ps 5326 R560 Huo699 211 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 24 3 95k 1 HU0257 0446 201 CR311 446 lt 0522 TURN ON CKT 10 42 S cvo OV COMP j ET REM Ai ECOLE SV TREE 3 lt lt ov VOLT 21 VOLTAGE LOOP 3 OT CL LOOP 16 CL LOOP 3 UNREG CL_LooP 5 CL LOOP 3 QUT_ENB OU SENSE 25 OV SENSE 4 Y gt POV DIS CAP_IN za ON OFF 34 Srat 58175 TRIP STATUS RESET 9 ON OFF 1 L THERM 4 THERM VOD s gt 54 STAT SEL ver 55 gt 150 PCLR VEE 5 gt 15 UB 7V GND C350 C347 C349 C348 C346 C432 C382 22 ae 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 5 000PF 4200 560 500 500 500 150 1000 1000 150 VW Q343 0 9 Sy DU GATE ias LU ONLY CR356 CR357 CR358 2515 R498 C427 R500 R501 R496 AAA eV 82 5 C426 68 1 100 R528 0 10045 NNN U354 5492 je 1 2 49 MC34062 UR316 sx UCC SENSE gt 10M JTN E EA 6 Nc BE DRIUE 30U 5 TB1 0V pi R494 CR360 CR359 R495 R497 R514 1 6 OUTPUT C429 HU ONLY 1 09 4 WV Km ANN 2 R4oz 21 5 16 26 390 5 2 49 SEN2 REM UTRIP 500 1N5817 1744 2 2
26. 425 OIRASSO od 2424 bo edgaez o 9 OPO 3 e R359 o o 9 1 356 956 G C334 0 G R4560 a Rao5lo 98494 0 004390 0542 o 5 al RT SIST gt ol 3 lo OLJE edczss e o mn 23520 6 R345 0 mcR sgo 918505 5440 LO Glasse S al m M R310 0 6 R358 0 O R418 O Bb x ooo 95 544 t3530 560 Gicrsato a 94184550 vllo lo otto ol gt jo 6 cz4zl 0 G R497 0 OG C42 Fo Lo R457 5 5 5 5 5 P302B ED UR31600 G EL R515 Figure 6 3 Output 1 8 2 Board Component Location 6 9 DC 0 7 1 2 C600 2 CU DAC 0 TO 1 TIY UREF A 10U ISOLATED 3MM 0 1 aJ 500 ver R333 51 2 Ri 0515 30 TM 18175 301 DTS WRZ P3028 4 lt Urs le C333 P2028 1 lt XFER UREF P3028 3 Et 2 0111 RFB P3028 2 lt BOE DI10 DIS IOUT1 pay 16 P3020 2 36 4 ore BOS B ra P3020 4 C320 DCD 6 016 P302 3 mE 5015 AGND OR RSEN EE 1 014 7 CS 1230 60 NY ISOLATED 3MM DGND 10 R327 3 10U U REF
27. AND RECTIFIER L TO BIAS SUPPLY CIRCUIT OUTPUT BOARD 2 SEE FIG 6 3 TO ISOLATOR INPUT FILTER CIRCUITS AND RECTIFIER To BIAS SUPPLY CIRCUIT OUTPUT BOARD 3 SEE FIG 6 3 P302 P O WE ISOLATOR Tour CIRCUITS FILTER AND RECTIFIER WHTZORY 24 TER AND RECTIFIER TO BIAS SUPPLY CIRCUIT X NOTE THE 6627A CABLE WIRES ARE A SOLID COLOR NOT STRIPED ie VIOLET NOT WHT VIO GND OUTPUT BOARD I 5 2 DFS2 GND TO OUTPUT BOARD 2 DTS2 sv P302 DFS3 GND OUTPUT BOARD 3 DTS3 GND FROM GPIB BOARD 5V P205 DTS DFS2 GND FROM GPIB BOARD 5v P206 DTSZ FROM GPIB BOARD P207 0754 GND FROM GPIB BOARD 5V 208 Figure 6 1 Power Distribution Schematic sheet 2 of 2 6 6 U280 U w sii 2 R M Mp 118 a 8888 R z K TELE mii 8 RAT R211 vos NM lt 4205 4207 pa m m Ze 5 552 U207 8 2 9 M s zu meee meee R22 1220 eo m m ER EN EN C235 C232 P209 EB SI gt gt ele P 0202 C209 CO nu 6208 am 5 p3 EE
28. Qualifier and Functional Labels FigureA 1 shows qualifiers and functional labels Qualifiers denote basic logic function For example amp denotes the AND function Functional labels such as DEMUX for a demultiplexer identify complex devices sD limes gt gt Figure A 1 Distinctive Shape Outlines Flip Flop Binary element with two states set and reset When the flip flop is set its outputs will be in their active states When the flip flop is reset its outputs will be in their inactive states AND inputs must be active for the output to be active OR One or more inputs being active will cause the output to be active EXCLUSIVE OR Output will be active when one and only one input is active Buffer or Inverter Without special amplification m and only m Output will be active when m and only m inputs are active m is replaced with a number Logic identity Output will be active only when all or none of the inputs are active 1 when all inputs are identical output will be active Amplifier The output will be active only when the input is active can be used with polarity or logic indicator at input or output to signify inversion Signal Level Converter or Code Converter Input level s are different than output level s or input code X is converted to output code Y per weighted values or table Cou
29. The differences should not be more than those listed below for the particular output being tested Negative Current Limit Output Readback TC Spec 40WLV 113mA 80WLV 22 6 mA 40WHV 4 4 mA 80WHV 8 6 mA Table 3 4 Performance Test Record for 40WLV and 80WLV Outputs Model 40WLV _______ _ Pre Cal Post ______ Serial Temperature Test Performed Output No Humidity Date Para Test Specification 40WLV 80WLV CV PROGRAMMING 0 Volts Output Accuracy DVM Reading 0 V 19 mV 19 mV Display Accuracy DVM 25 mV DVM 25 mV Readback Accuracy DVM 20 mV DVM 20 mV CV PROGRAMMING FULL SCALE Output Accuracy DVM Reading 20V 31 mV 20V 31 mV Display Accuracy DVM 35 mV DVM 35 mV Readback Accuracy DVM 30 mV DVM 30 mV CV SOURCE EFFECT m CV NOISE PARD Peak to Peak 3 mV 3 mV Rms 500 zV 500 pV CV DOWN PROG SPEED Time Constant to 37 7 4 V 250 uS 250 uS 20 mV 2 2 UP PROGRAMMING SPEED Time Constant to 63 12 6 V 250 uS 250 4S To Full Scale 20 mV 2 mS 2 mS BEE TURN ON OFF OVERSHOOT 0 100 mV 0 V 100 mV E OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION Fixed OV 22 7 to 25 7 22 7 to 25 7 V Programmable 919 V 18 74 to 19 26 V 18 74 to 19 26 V External OV Check if OK Check if OK CC PROGRAMMING 0 Amps Output Accuracy 10 80 mA 50 Display Accuracy 15 mA Readback Accuracy
30. 1 Be certain to use the correct test setup 2 Note the signatures for Vcc 5 V and ground on the IC being examined If an incorrect signature is the same as that of Vcc or ground that point is probably shorted to Vcc or ground 3 If two pins have identical signatures they are probably shorted together If two signatures are similar it is only concidence 4 If a signature is incorrect at an input pin but is correct at its source output of the previous IC check for printed circuit and soldering problems 5 An incorrect signature at an output could be caused by a faulty component producing that output It can also be caused by an input short circuit in another component on the board 4 14 4 23 Test Setup for S A Figure 4 8 shows the general test setup for the signature analysis tests given in Tables 4 6 through 4 13 Note that jumper pack W202 can be installed in either of two positions as shown in Figure 4 8 The following is a general description of the test setup Specific signature analyzer and jumper connections for each test are given in the applicable table a Gain access to the GPIB board components as described in paragraph 4 19 Be sure that the power supply is turned off before continuing with the following steps b Connect jumper W201 in the SIG ANALYSIS position across pins 5 and 6 of connector P201 as shown in Figure 4 8 c Short pins 1 and 4 together on connectors P205 through P208 as shown in
31. 10U 11 c 101083 5 1084 DBS Dy 8 om 1 Lo SZ 5V 082 AGND NCR309 1000 DAC A B DAC A B i iem HS sze PA CS2 SAR 4 f 1 28 PCLR DGND 5955 RESET UREE B SA z JIN 0 594 4 VEC 18 EXTAL 9525 A1 PCLR C325 C324 Y300 25 aer I E 5 24 STATUS RESET STATUS RESET 5 4 In 23 DISABLE POV DISABLE 25 pur OUT ENABLE 6 QUT ENABLE l 7 FUSE STICK I 150 150 c 26529 R328 8 50 YORERDBACK I 0 I 0 9 15 i R328 FOR MC68705 DAC A B 19 on 10 s 7 R329 FOR MC6805 1 2 UCC R337 R325 C450 gt eSI 0321 R335 SA ANN R D CS3 6 G WR2__ 499K 27 408 4 72 715 B1 B2 100U DAC R B e lZ XFER UREF SA Ws 50 DC 1510111 RFB R364 27 9 DC6 14 prio pcs 15 IOUTi 511 064 16 15 550 DGS 4 1017 C341 3 Rm D a 57525 pia 2 52 001 6 1015 5200 0325 12 D00 7 1600 08508 pie ____ 11 CS3 1 514 EN 51 pi CS 1230LCD R340 8 52 5 R344 pt DGND sz Ps 10 4 99K 54 2 10K bZ 1 12 ao 55 U312 16 11 REF T 0i 151 S6 10 W 57 s8 23 3K 1 15U 13 5 Ax E SHUNT AMP C343 GND CS0 14 CR310 NOTES UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED AW NMP ALL RESISTOR VALUE ARE IN OHMS 1x 1 8W ALL CAPACITOR VALUES ARE IN MICOFARADS DENOTES TERM NOT DENOTES HIGH VOLTAGE 15U Figure 6 5 Out
32. 3 SLKZYEL 25 FROM MODULE t 4 ELEN 5 120 VAC Tt W5 d WAT VIOLET 45 wry rec 12VAC 420 uroen 24 VAC 130 wry a amp u 24 VAC YELLOW RED wig GPIB BOARD SEE FIG 6 2 P303 P303 TO INPUT FILTER CIRCUIT CIRCUITS RECTIFIER TO BIAS SUPPLY CIRCUIT ISOLATOR CIRCUITS TO INPUT FILTER AND RECTIFIER P302 FROM GPIB BOARD P205 2 3 FROM LINE MODULE 4 5 FROM GPIB BOARD P206 420 VAC P O 4 FOR AGILENT 6623 V r SA warnio SOA warzysi AA VAC lt GA WHITE wur a BA mrsa 22274272 FILTER FILTER BIAS SUPPLY GPIB BOARD SEE 6 2 CIRCUITS 0 m AND RECTIFIER TO ISOLATOR CIRCUITS TO INPUT FILTER AND RECTIFIER TO BIAS SUPPLY CIRCUIT To ISOLATOR Mur CIRCUITS AND RECTIFIER CIRCUIT TO OUTPUT BOARD 3 P302 OFS GND 5V FROM GPIB BOARD P205 OFS2 GND FROM GPIB BOARD 5V P206 DTS2 GND FROM GP B BOARD t 5V P207 100 VAC 3 TE FROM LINE MODULE FOR AGILENT 6624A amp 6627A td GPIB BOARD SEE FIG 6 2 P207 P O w8 ISOLATOR CIRCUITS To INPUT FILTER
33. Agilent Part Description Mfg Mfg No Code Part No R443 0698 6414 FXD FILM 1K 1 1 8W 28480 R444 0699 0934 FILM 35 65 1 28480 R445 0757 0280 FILM 1K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 1001F R446 0698 4480 FXD FILM 15 8K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 10 1002 R447 0757 0440 FXD FILM 7 5K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 10 7501F R448 40WLV 80WLV 0757 0462 FXD FILM 75K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 10 7502F 40WHV 80WHV 0757 0469 FXD FILM 150K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 10 1503F R449 40WLV 0757 0282 FXD FILM 221 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 221RF 40WHV 0698 3447 FXD FILM 422 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 422RF 80WLV 0757 4406 FXD FILM 115 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 562RF 80WHV 0698 3486 FXD FILM 232 1 1 8W 28480 R450 0698 8827 FXD FILM 1M 1 1 8W 28480 R451 0757 0280 FXD FILM 1K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 1001F R452 0757 0283 FXD FILM 2K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 2001F R453 0698 4480 FXD FILM 15 8K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 R454 0699 0953 FXD FILM 15 4K 1 28480 R455 0698 8827 FXD FILM 1M 1 1 8W 28480 R456 40WLV 40WHV 0698 0087 FXD FILM 316 1 1 4W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 316RF 80WLV 80WHV 0686 1515 COMP 150 5 1 2W 28480 R457 40WLV 80WLV 0811 2553 FXD FILM 7 5 5 2W 01281 BWH2 7R5 J 40WHV 80WHV 0698 3609 FXD FILM 225 2W 16299 FP42 2 T00 22R0J R458 0757 0442 FXD FILM 10K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 10 1002F R459 0757 0446 FXD FILM 15K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 10 1502F R460 0698 8913 FXD FILM 1 5M 1 1 8W 28480 R461 0683 4735 FXD FILM 47K 5 1 4W 01121 CB4735 R462 0757 0288
34. CC PROGRAMMING FULL SCALE Output Accuracy Io 58 mA Display Accuracy Io 20 mA Readback Accuracy 3 20 130 mA 100 mA lo 25 mA lo 20 mA 10A 116 mA lo 35 mA lo 30mA Low Range Limit Is 5 35 to 5 85A 10 7 to 11 7A Display Accuracy Is 42 mA Is 78 mA Readback Accuracy Is 37 mA Is 73 mA High Range Limit 2 25 to 2 55A 4 5 to 5 1A Page of 3 16 Table 3 5 Performance Test Record for 40WHV and 80WHV Outputs Model 40WHV _______ SOWHV ______ Pre Cal__ Post Cal Serial No o Temperature ____________ Test Performed By Humidity Date Output No Specification CV PROGRAMMING 0 Volts Output Accuracy DVM Reading 25 mV 25 mV Display Accuracy DVM 55 mV DVM 55 mV Readback Accuracy DVM 50 mV DVM 50 mV CV PROGRAMMING FULL SCALE Output Accuracy DVM Reading Display Accuracy Readback Accuracy 3 13 CV LOAD EFFECT 3 14 CV SOURCE EFFECT CV NOISE PARD 50 V 50 mV DVM 80 mV DVM 75 mV Peak to Peak CV DOWN PROG SPEED Time Constant to 37 18 5 V To 50 mV CV UP PROGRAMMING SPEED Time Constant to 63 12 6 V To Full Scale 50 mV TRANSIENT RECOVERY 6753 TURN ON OFF OVERSHOOT 0 V 100 mV 0 V 100 mV OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION Fixed OV 56 8 to 63 5 V 56 8 t
35. Desig Table 4 2 Fuses Description AC Line Module Figure 6 1 F1 Main fuse ac line Clip mounted in line module on rear of unit HP IB Board Figure 6 2 F201 Bias supply fuse Soldered to board 40WLV Output Board Fig 6 3 Sheet 2 F300 F301 F305 F306 F302 F303 F304 F307 F308 F309 Secondary ac input fuses Output bleed circuit and downprogrammer circuit fuse Output return fuse Secondary ac input fuses Bias AC Input Fuses 40WHV Output Board Fig 6 3 sheet 2 F300 F301 F305 F306 F302 F303 F304 F307 F308 F309 Secondary ac input fuses Output bleed circuit and downprogrammer circuit fuse Output return fuse Secondary ac input fuse Not used Bias AC Input Fuses 80WLV Output Board Fig 6 3 Sheet 3 F300 F301 F302 F303 F304 F305 F306 F307 F308 F309 Not used Bleed circuit and downprogrammer circuit fuse Output return fuse Secondary ac input fuse Secondary ac input fuses Not used Bias AC Input Fuses 4 6 For 100 120 V 8 A 250 V Normal Blow or For 220 240 V 4 A 250 V Normal Blow 4 A 125 V 10 A 125 V 0 5 A 125 V 7 A 125 V 7A 125V 2 A slo blo 7 A 125 V 0 25 A 125 V 7 125 V 10 A 125 V 2 A slo blo 0 5 A 125 V 20 A 250 V 8 SA slo blo 20 A 250 V 2 A slo blo 2110 0342 2110 0055 2110 0712 2110 0713 2110 0716 2110 0685 2110 0685 2110 0303 2110 0685 2110 0763 2110 0685 2110 0713 210
36. FO R457 FO pff 57 EE 2595 R441 P302 a 344 34 Q PRANE 819 R340 0554 31535845 SR Ragoo 918242 9 000 az41 9 o o a m o 6 R345h0 C1R333 9 CR310 0 R358 6 elcz98 0 23 4200 446 ag BO o ll er3440 355 G R348 0 454 424 466 RAE 2222050 9 gt la ejezig o 9125456 944479 5479 R452 6 Razzle okie SEES HRM E ole ra beh n gl c381 010350 0 Lo opm o G Rz46 0 Of n o 421 C4076 6 czos o 842879 C3906 6 5 HHUVR3130O e o Ol o o ol lo R345 murzo o So 98422 0 RA2S O GHCRZ51 0 R4 RS 6403 1301 2 9999 0000 z jo o Mo epe 95140 op o Heze ol o 1035083540 PAS BES R433 0 e paz gt otrase Lo 984555 5 2 En m 0311 9 59 o gt Jo 268 9783650 of Lo R491 9 oGls428 o 6 R4690 8454 I u R481 0 aj oj a m o 7 lo n o 918360 9 G R351 0 385 84785 6422 9685509 lo 9485130 R M ol 9 90000 eTzeg 9 5429 Ol lo 91035909 G R352l e 55 5 8 62555 elczozko 37 C402 GR480L 0 0 PPO 9 99 eiezes o o G C354 0 11 46 DY o eEsosre C389 Fe 5 Nom 9 522 amp 1 333 9 e cz86ho e 0387 0 o ho 0 jo q 915409 9 o c4e7 O m m CL esse IG 54 3228 s
37. Retain the lock or flat washers for reassembly d Remove four screws which hold the heat sink assembly to the chassis These screws must be removed completely NOTE If an insulator is present beneath the heat sink assembly be sure to align all four holes in theinsulator with the heat sink holes when replacing the four screws e Slide the board forward slightly to disengage the keyed standoffs f Lift the board out of the chassis 4 9 Replacing the Power odule U 338 U 339 Use the following procedure when it has been determined that the power module U338 on 40 W boards U338 and 0339 on 80 W boards is defective and must be replaced 4 4 40 Watt Output Boards a Remove the output board as described in paragraph 4 7 b Carefully unsolder all 14 power module pins c Renove the power module and heat sink from the board d Remove four power module screws and retain all hardware e Wipe the heat sink surface to remove the old layer of heat sink compound Apply a thin layer of new compound to the back surface of the replacement power module f Reassemble using the reverse of the above procedure Before soldering the new power module heat sink assembly to the board be sure that the heat sink lies flat and securely against the board Use the long heat sink screws and M4 nuts to temporarily hold the assembly to the board while soldering 80 Watt Output Boards a Remove the output board as described in paragr
38. S 2 912 SDD 00MNOD ONE HSH 8 WO Ju 118 8 20 80 SO NO 1680 kh asten sien 20 80 338 D 233 797 qx 13538 ar Ea 280 118 8 wa bien 196 Te 2 0 803 NOLLUSNIGKOD avy 380 T zy ANE FR 233 280 4 118 21 8 438 0 19 77 1 0 0id0 Fwr PV I nen g d wa e f ke t E 2 913 Y COS 8149 37BUS7U AOG 385 0180 WOOL ia zi est 8 e mu ER aren 8 4 00 da O gt OBEGHZU 3081 10A ES auno w 0014 3503 aM SEE BW 25 08 7 24 Figure 2 4 Output Board Secondary Interface Circuits Block Diagram 2 9 is high the ON OFF signal is low and turns off the control circuit thus preventing power from reaching the output terminals If the line voltage drops below a minimum level the comparator described above will shut down the output remove power from the output terminals until normal line voltage is restored This resets the microcomputer and sets the output to the turn on state 2 33 Bias Supplies and Precision Reference Voltage The bias supplies U 300 U 303 generate the voltages required to operate the circuits on the output board The precision reference voltage circuit 0318 U319A operates from the 15 V bias and generates the VREF outputs 10 V 0 5 which is used by the
39. TESTS S I COAX CABLE L ro VOLTMETER CC TESTS Figure 3 3 Basic Test Setup 3 5 Table 3 3 High Range Voltage and Current Values Output Full Scale Max Prog Full Scale Max Prog Min Prog Board Voltage Voltage Current Current Current An output channel cannot be programmed to 0 amps If the output channel receives a command to go to 0 amps or any positive it will current below the minimum programmable current 3 15 CV Noise PARD Periodic and random deviations PARD in the output ripple and noise combine to produce a residual ac voltage superimposed on the dc output voltage CV PARD is specified as the rms or peak to peak output voltage in a frequency range from 20 Hz to 20 MHz This test measures the rms and peak to peak noise on the output a Turn off the supply and connect the output to be tested as shown in Figure 3 3 to an oscilloscope ac coupled between the 4S and S terminals the Load switch dosed and the Short switch opened Be sure to keep the leads from the 50 ohm impedance matching resistor and the 50 ohm coaxial cable shield that run to the 5 and S terminals as short as possible to avoid external noise pickup b Turn on the supply and select the output to be tested OUTPUT SELECT key on thefront pand Program the current to the Low Range Maximum Programmable Current Value and the output voltage to the Low Range Full Scale Voltage value See Table 3 2 by sending the
40. Table 5 5 Agilent 6621A 6624A Multiple Output Power Supplies Parts List Desig Agilent Part Description Mfg Code Mfg No Part No GPIB Board 06624 60029 GPIB Board Assembly See Table 5 6 Output Board 1 See Table 5 7 6621 06621 60023 80W Low Voltage 80WLV Bd 28480 6622 06622 60021 80W High Voltage 80WHV Bd 28480 6623 24 06624 60028 40W Low Voltage 40WLV Bd 28480 6627 06627 60023 40W High Voltage 40WHV 28480 Output Board 2 See Table 5 7 6621 23 06621 60023 80W Low Voltage 80WLV Bd 28480 6622 06622 60021 80W High Voltage 80WHV Bd 28480 6624 06624 60028 40W Low Voltage 40WLV Bd 28480 6627 06627 60023 40W High Voltage 40WHV 28480 Output Board 3 See Table 5 7 6621 22 NOT USED 6623 24 27 06627 60022 40W High Voltage 40WHV 28480 Output Board 4 See Table 5 7 6621 22 23 NOT USED 6624 27 06627 60022 40W High Voltage 40WHV Bd 28480 Front Panel 5040 1660 FRONT FRAME 6621 06621 00004 FRONT PANEL LTR 28480 6622 06622 00004 FRONT PANEL LTR 28480 6623 06623 00004 FRONT PANEL LTR 28480 6624 06624 00007 FRONT PANEL LTR 28480 6627 06627 00002 FRONT PANEL LTR 28480 5063 2304 LCD DISPLAY for through hole GPIB assemblies 28480 5063 3472 LCD DISPLAY for surface mount GPIB assemblies Chassis Electrical B1 3160 0097 COOLING FAN TBAX 3160 0092 GUARD COOLING FAN 9135 0419 LINE MODULE 28480 CO 5060 3218 22uF CAP ASSY REF LINE MOD 28480 0160 4259 22uF CAP REF 5060 3218 28480 F1 2110 0
41. This circuit provides limit to the amount of current that the supply can sink The circuit may be activated if a current source such as another power supply or energy storage capacitor is connected across the output terminals and its voltage is greater than the programmed output voltage When the output is in negative current limit this circuit generates the CL control and the CL LOOP signals The CL control signal is applied through diode CR354 to the base drive circuit The CL LOOP signal is sent back to the secondary interface to indicate that the output is in the negative current limit mode As shown in the simplified schematic of Figure 2 6 the negative current limit circuit consist mainly of open collector toggle comparator part of U351 and CL error amplifier 0350 The voltage drop I MON across thecurrent monitoring 2 14 resistor R408 is applied to summing junction 53 along with a reference voltage Based on this summing action error amplifier U350 generates the CL control signal which is applied through diode CR354 to control the base drive circuit Comparator U 351 toggles the reference voltage between two different levels This is required because the output board has two fixed ranges a high voltage low current range and a low voltage high current range Figure 2 7 illustrates the output range characteristics for the various output board types As you can seein the figure a 40W low voltage board
42. for 80WHV outputs k Repeat steps through j for each output in your supply c Program the selected output s voltage to the Low Range Full Scale Voltage value and the current to the Low Range Maximum Programmable Current value see Table 3 2 d With R2 disconnected adjust R1 for 300 mA for 40WLV 80WLV outputs or 150 mA for 40WHV 80WHV outputs as indicated on the front panel display CHANNEL B SBmv DIV CHANNEL A SV OR 18v DIV TRIGGER CHANNEL R 20V OR Sev BI TF PROGRAMMING RESPONSE TIME lt 2mS FOR 4GWLV BSGNLV 250 5 FOR 4BLLV BONLV ROS FOR SET LEY OMV lt SBUS FOR 4 B NHV TIME BRSE 8 2m5 DIV FOR 4QWLV BGWLV 1mS DIV FOR 4GWHV SOWHV Figure 3 7 CV Up Programming Speed Test Waveforms e Connect R2 and adjust to read the Low Range Full Scale current value on the front panel display Note that the CV annundator should be on If it is not on readjust R2 until itis on f Set the osdlloscope to 50 mv div ac coupled 10 us div internal trigger normal and slope g Turn on the load switch to perform the transient response test Alternatively remove R1 and modulate an electronic load between 300 mA 40WLV 80WLV outputs or 150 mA 40WHV 80WHV outputs and the Low Range Full Scale Current value Note that if an eledronic load is used the load s current rise time must be less than 25 usec to perform an adequate test If a load with
43. particular output type being tested k Repeat steps a through j for each output in the supply 3 33 Long Term Voltage Drift Test This test measures the output voltage drift over an 8 hour period Place the supply to be tested in a temperature chamber or in a temperature controlled environment such as a standards room a Turn off the supply and connect the output to be tested as shown in Figure 3 3 with the DVM connected across the S and S terminals the load switch closed and the short switch opened b Turn on the supply and select the output to be tested OUTPUT SELECT key on the front pand c Program the current of the selected output to the Low Range Maximum Programmable Current value and the output voltage to the Low Range Full Scale value see Table 3 2 d Adjust the load for slightly less than Low Range Full Scale Current as read on the display Check that the CV annunciator is on e Wait 30 minutes and record the output voltage reading onthe DVM f Observe and record the output voltage reading periodically over an 8 hour period The difference between any two readings should not exceed 1 84 mV for 40WLV 80WLV outputs or 34 mV for 40WH V 80WHV outputs g Repeat steps a through f for each output in your supply 3 34 Long Term Current Drift This test measures the output current drift over an 8 hour period Place the supply to be tested in a temperature chamber or in a temperature controlled environment such as
44. 1 1 8W 24546 CT4 i 8 TO 5622 R208 0757 0442 FXD FILM 10K 1 1 8W 24546 CT4 1 8 TO 1002F R209 0757 0449 FXD FILM 20K 1 1 8W 24546 CT4 1 8 TO 2002 R210 0698 4536 FXD FILM 340K 1 1 8W 28480 R211 0757 0442 FXD FILM 10K 1 1 8W 24546 CT4 1 8 TO 1002F R212 0698 4440 FXD FILM 3 4K 1 1 8W 24546 CT4 1 8 TO 3401 R213 0757 0438 FXD FILM 5 11K 1 1 8W 24546 CT4 1 8 TO 5111F R214 0698 3359 FXD FILM 12 7K 1 1 8W 24546 CT4 1 8 TO 1272 R215 216 0757 0438 FXD FILM 5 11K 1 1 8W 24546 CT4 1 8 TO 5111F R217 0757 0411 FXD FILM 332 1 1 8W 24546 CT4 1 8 TO 332R R218 0757 0438 FXD FILM 5 11K 1 1 8W 24546 CT4 1 8 TO 5111F R219 1810 0560 RES NETWORK 16 DIP 5 6Kx8 28480 R220 222 0757 0442 FXD FILM 10K 1 1 8W 24546 CT4 1 8 TO 1002F R223 230 0757 0438 FXD FILM 5 11K 1 1 8W 24546 CT4 1 8 TO 5111F R231 232 0757 0280 FXD FILM 1K 1 1 8W 24546 CT4 1 8 TO 1001F R233 0757 0438 FXD FILM 5 11K 1 1 8W 24546 CT4 1 8 TO 5111F R234 0698 4440 FXD FILM 3 4K 1 1 8W 24546 CT4 1 8 TO 3401F R235 241 NOT USED R242 8159 0005 FXD FILM ZERO OHMS 28480 RT201 0837 0412 THERMISTOR ROD 2K 28480 U201 1820 2490 IC MPU CLK FREQ I MHZ 04713 MC6809P 0202 1820 2549 8291A TALKER LISTENER 28480 U203 1LH4 0001 IC GPIB TRANSCEIVER 28480 U204 1820 1730 IC OCTAL D TYPE LATCH 28480 U205 NOT USED U206 5080 2093 IC PRGMD EPROM STANDARD 28480 U207 1818 1845 IC NMOS 16K STATIC RAM 34335 AM9128 10PC U208 1820 1216 IC DCDR TTL LS 3 TO 8 LINE 01295 SN74LS138N U209 1820 0935 IC COUNTER CMOS BINARY 0
45. 20 0 lt 20 0 lt 20 0 lt 20 0K lt 20 0K RZ60 dx 24 3K HU0699 1211 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 95K 1 H E 15k N CR312 0522 TURN ON CKT 49 Mte 2 18090 OV_COMP DC2 10 0 05 08 4 REMOTE OU TRIP CLO REM OU_TRIP 216 vaner VOLTAGE DCA TER or CL_LO0P UNREG CL_LOOP 4 24 OUT_ENB DU_SENSE OV SENSE 57 POV DIS CAP_IN 34K BIAS TRIP 3 4 STATUS RESET 25 ON OFF 7 1 OP THERM lt 7 STAT_RE 4 gt 11 THERM VOD 5 5U E z STAT SEL UCC R355 C351 PCLR VEE SU lt AAA 8 25K GND C348 C432 C359 5 io gar GAD 16346 1000 T4200PF CS0 1000 la 1 PEERS GATE S dx Gie LU DNLY C427 R500 CR356 m R501 CR358 R496 wie Nr DUT TERM ANA 130 eee 130 100 R520 Ces 9554 Bie 6919 95 MC34062 108077 YR316 5 1 5_ SENSE voc 1744 350 4 10M JTN m dg NC er DRIVE 2 300 5x TB1 0V 421 s DU R44 7270 CR359 R495 R497 R514 ure OUTPUT 6483 MANGE NE BI 00 o UTRIP 01 8 722 390 5 1000 4 2 C418 Use R493 21 5 16 2K al 2 49 UTRIP 50U AN 2 21K SHOTTKY LU ONLY C422 101 6 490 C440 C439 21 5 R508 1000 Ale E7 HU ONLY 10 cus 2200 2200 FIXED 0 0 CIRCUIT 1 24 250U 1000 1000 Figure 6 3 Output 1 amp 2 Board Schematic Diagram sheet 2 of 4 AWWW W AA REMOTE OV TRIP
46. 4 37 4 11 High Voltage Output Board Waveforms During Self Exercise 4 39 4 12 DAC Amplifier Circuit Troubleshooting aaa aaa aa aaa aaa eee nnne nennen nne nnn 4 41 4 13 Overvoltage Troubleshootirig au u caer KE Aa REX ede USE EC RATER hisua 4 42 4 14 Output Held Low Troubleshooting eee EI IE en hene ren hne nne ne nnne tenete nnn nennen nnn en 4 44 4 15 Output Held High Troubleshooting eee 4 47 4 16 OV Circuit Will Not Trip Troubleshooting eee meme meme kazan aaa aaa ene ne nnne ren rne n 4 48 4 17 Signal Processor U327 Overvoltage Circuit Schematic Simplified eee 4 53 4 18 Signal Processor U327 Power On Start Up Circuit Schematic Simplified esses n 4 53 4 19 Signal Processor U327 Status Monitor Circuit Simplified 5 aaa A 4 57 4 20 Status Problems Troubleshooting 1 EI 4 58 6 1 Power Distribution 5 21 1 2 1 1 a RE tese mene e nene tese rene n rn 6 5 6 2 Component E ocati Ons 2 n E RERO REOR Ok EO Eme ds Peas 6 7 62 GPIB Board Schematic Diagram RE
47. 4 5 B4 pa 6 38 pjog D4 Po Do Qo 1818 6669 11 w 15 1 1Y 4 7 39 13 5 3 8 an 54 ZE b z 2 D A D103 3 B3 D3 DIO3 D5 D1 1775268 d i gt RE xH 2 3 8 41 06 12 Di 02 4 D2 Q2 7 E A0 TEST Q3 D3 3 gn 5 s 3Y D102 gt 82 52 p E 5 A 4 2 4208 NL1251 5385 5 6 pa 3 Fe PT 9 8 D101 B1 D1 0101 07 S A D3 Q3 1252 2493 2 2208 GND e SCL 05 0514 D5 B n i 4A 4 16 TE 4 J208 NL1251 5385 3 5 7 o Ez D M 9 11 GANF o 05 7 4 E 2 SDA Q6 D6 6 10 13 12 CONT RS2 05 Q5 R220 P208 8 E3 05 6A 8 pe _ 8 3 1252 2493 3 P20 5 an 0718 0 7 of D Q6 VVV 08 06 1820 5612 A 1820 6176 5298 1 or ges 2 NL1251 5385 vss u 05 e B 07 DAV 6 GND S 2 NC2 1820 8461 0699 1391 224 1252 2493 4 P208 DTS 4 1821 0299 GND I F PN 5 di 10 8 328 nog GND rng WESA E e ae r 10 L_ 0 on ha ATN 11 NC4 50V FIX OPTO AL CONN voc 1 7 0160 5222 IN ONE PLACE V x U283 028 NZ D 0 7 73 1 51035 V D 0 7 NILS 24 0 7 Ua 1Y KS 5V REN 3 zu m 25 R242 5 2 2Y 20 27 WES ANN E r NRFD WE A 0 15 W ES A 0 15 10M 5 SA _____ 945 P i 1W 500 NS 5 74 4A ay U280 29 pay 32 0699 3819 gt 02 20 5A 5Y 75ALS161 bo 32 S of 13 EOI CLK 0507 E po ver 7 pers z gt DE
48. 5098 FXD CER 22uF 10 50VDC 24546 CACO05X7R224J050A C430 0160 4795 FXD CER 4 7pF 5 100V 28480 C431 0160 4812 FXD CER 220pF 5 100VDC 28480 C432 0160 4822 FXD CER 1000pF 5 100VDC 28480 C433 434 0180 2623 F XD ELECT 12uF 10 6V ALUM 28480 C435 40WLV 80WLV 0160 4789 FXD 15pF 5 100V 28480 4OWHV 80WHV 0160 4807 FXD CER 33PF 5 100V 28480 C436 40WLV 80WLV 0160 6998 40WHV 80WHV 0160 6999 439 440 0160 4830 FXD 2200pF 10 100VDC 28480 C600 0160 4835 FXD CER 0 1uF 10 50V 28480 CR300 304 1901 0731 DIO PWR RECT 400V 1A 80795 1N4004G CR305 308 NOT USED 13141 1N4150 CR309 1901 0050 DIO SW 80795 1N4004G CR310 1901 0731 DIO PWR RECT 400V 1A 28480 CR311 312 1901 0028 DIO PWR RECT CR313 317 NOT USED 1N4150 CR318 1901 0050 DIO PWR 13141 1N4004G CR319 1901 0731 DIO PWR RECT 400V 1A 80795 CR320 323 NOT USED CR324 1901 0028 DIO PWR RECT 28480 CR325 40WLV 40WHV 1901 0719 DIO PWR RECT 04713 MR854 80WLV SOWHV 1901 0731 DIO PWR RECT 80795 1N4004G CR326 1901 0028 DIO PWR RECT 28480 CR327 1901 0731 DIO PWR RECT 400V 1A 80795 1N4004G CR328 1901 0028 DIO PWR RECT 28480 CR329 1901 0050 DIO SW 13141 1N4150 CR330 1901 0033 CR33 333 1901 0050 DIO SW 13141 1N4150 CR334 335 40WLV 4OWHV 1901 0028 DIO PWR RECT 28480 80WLV 1901 0050 DIO SW 13141 1N4150 80WHV NOT USED CR336 40WLV 40WHV NOT USED 80WLV SOWHV 1901 0731 DIO PWR RECT 80795 1N4004G CR337 338 NOT USED CR339 40WLV 40WHV NOT USED 80WLV SOWHV 1901 0033 DIO SW 13141 1N645 C
49. Absence of polarity indicator see below implies that the active state is a relative high voltage level Polarity Indicator The active state is a relatively low voltage level Dynamic Indicator The active state is a transition from a relative low to a relative high voltage level or from a high to a low voltage level if a polarity indicator is shown outside symbol Non Logic Indicator Input or output does not carry logic information e g RC inputs to a one shot multivibrator Open Circuit Output general symbol Open Circuit Output H Level NPN open emitter PNP open collector P channel FET open drain N channel FET open source Open Circuit Output L Level NPN open collector PNP open emitter P channel FET open source N channel FET open drain Analog Input or Output Used only when necessary to distinquish analog signals Digital Input or Output Used only when necessary to distinguish digital signals Data Input Always enabled by another input generally a C input see Dependency Notation Any D input is associated with storage 4 IT gt lt Indicator Symbols Inidicator symbols identify the active state of a devices input or output shown in Figure A 3 Shift Right Down Input When active causes the contents of a shift register to shift to the right or down m places m is replaced with number NOTE If m 1 it is omitted Postponed Output Outpu
50. C600 CU DAC 0 TO 10U 3 they A 104 ISOLATED ZMM 04 500 R333 159 csi 0513 M 1 si op C333 DFS DAC 81 82 12 user S 3 DCZ GND DC6 Br REB PCS DOS 9 1 047 1 PCS 5 4 1017 0 C2 E 5 C321 C320 5015 NE Sons FUN EE wc T 0 1 120PF 1 DL ISOLATED 3MM 71 500 1000 47 cs Aes 6 6 10 R327 R326 3 1 1K E 2 1 1K E 2 C323 10U REF 1 5 5 2 3 9311 0510 CC DAC 0 TO 10U 120PF 50 3 1000 30 a C329 EE Avena iun cac EEE czae ISOLATED CKT 3mm 0 1 V 0 4 500 500 DCO OU DAC TO 10U DG 2 DC4 DS DC6 5U D 7 DAC Ae B R338 0312 5 11K CS2 MC6805P2 i USS RESET 28 PCERE SINT 4 900 27 52 1U323 PCLR w 24 STATUS RESET STATUE RESET 5 23 DISABLE POUGDISRHHIKE 22 OUT ENABLE 2 4 21 OUT ENABLE NUM 55 2 TIMER PAO EE FUSE STICK I paz 12 DCZ 15U 6529 R328 8 18 D 6 READBACK i PCO 0 0 17 DCS I 10 251 PBS 16 DC4 R328 FOR MC68705 DAC A B PB4 R329 FOR MC6805 pas 5 peo 14 D a paz 14 R335 PBL DU 499K NOTES AWNH UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED ALL RESISTOR VALUE ARE IN OHMS 1 1 8W PBO 12 000 ALL CAPACITOR VALUES ARE IN MICOFARADS DENOTES TERM NOT DE
51. COMP overvoltage comparator input signal when High causes OV DRIVE pin 6 to be High gt 8V if POV DISABLE pin 3 is Low POV DISABLE pin 3 The POV DISABLE programmed overvoltage disable input signal when High prevents OV COMP pin 2 from causing OV DRIVE pin 6 to be High It does not prevent OV TRIP pin 4 from causing OV Drive to be High OV TRIP pin 4 This input signal when High causes OV DRIVE pin 6 to be High gt 11 V independent of POV DISABLE pin 3 Common pin 5 Along with pin 22 this is a common return for the bias supplies OV DRIVE pin 6 This output signal is a function of inputs OV COMP POV DISABLE and OV TRIP When OV DRIVE goes High it fires the SCR in the power module The OV DRIVE pin voltage will be 28V when tripped from OV COMP gt 11V when tripped from OV TRIP see Figure 4 17 STATUS RESET pin 7 This input pin when High causes four internal flip flops to be reset The four flip flops are used to catch and hold the occurrence of four status conditions CV CC CC and UNR 15 V pin 8 The 15 V bias voltage can range from 14 V to 15 66 V UNREG pin 9 The UNREG unregulated output signal open collector takes on the state of the internal UNR flip flop when STATUS SELECT pin 11 is Low The unregulated mode is indicated when UNREG isLow Figure 4 19 shows the conditions that cause UNREG to go Low UNREG 15 open circuited when STATUS SELECT is High
52. F307 cz64 RZ89 6 R425 9 00 ol cas n 904 elsi Po 6 R388 0 e R4346 of vo c420 D p 9 ets O L300 bo 8 F306 c389 o ol2 0 1 O F305 e czo4 o e R491 0 D n j j i q Sects CR325 5 Io 501 O G C402 0 9 lu a R443 0 6 R499 O C315 r R375 9 450 R441 R485 9 G C434 OO R366 a Rz65 0 G R475 0 o gaazl o G R428 0 o C435 0 E E G R476 0 G R426 0 O 9 512 Lee of of jo 555 25090 O RA4g O O R484 o 883 5 ojo 4 0 20 40 ER OG 1 e c345 98346 gt 225 8 R478 0 PELE 6440 o fo 9850220 TB1 oT o lo 9 o 21822279 R449 438 R4z9ko U 049489 Lo 5 a o O a JO n o G R362 0 R3427 4 08 o O C383 0 el 436 Lo c o JR483LFo G D ddh olla 999 M o o Mo o u lo ol 5 R431 m Jo gt m ol eRa454 ogo R482 o BE aleje mmm e o o lo 5 omo gt e RsiB e ol lo EE ool Blo o o 4521 RAS 6 D D S 224 O 13512 o GJC355 9 p o o lo lo 4 5 ol 2 io Oh o o o G R412 0 9 5 9 o Z o e c341 o 5 5 o8 5 o n e Lo jo o lo G R468 0 412 a
53. NOT USED C328 0160 4801 FXD CER 100pF 5 100VDC 28480 C329 0160 4835 FXD CER 0 1uF 10 50V 28480 C330 0160 4801 FXD CER 100pF 5 100VDC 28480 C331 332 NOT USED C333 334 0160 4835 FXD CER 0 1uF 10 50V 28480 C335 NOT USED C336 0160 4835 FXD CER 0 1uF 10 50V 28480 C337 0160 4814 FXD CER 150pF 5 100V 28480 C338 340 NOT USED C341 0160 4830 FXD CER 2200pF 10 100VDC 28480 C342 0160 4834 FXD CER 0 047uF 10 100VDC 28480 C343 344 0160 4835 FXD CER 0 1uF 10 50V 28480 C345 0160 4834 FXD CER 0 047uF 10 100VDC 28480 C346 0180 2264 FXD ELECT 3 3uF 15V 5 TAN 56289 150D335X5015A2 C347 350 0160 4835 FXD CER 0 1uF 10 50V 28480 C351 0160 4810 FXD CER 330pF 5 100VDC 28480 C352 0160 4554 FXD CER 01uF 20 50V 28480 C353 0160 4835 FXD CER 0 1uF 10 50V 28480 C354 0160 4822 FXD CER 1000pF 5 100VDC 28480 C355 0160 4831 FXD CER 4700pF 10 100VDC 28480 C356 0160 4812 FXD CER 220pF 5 100VDC 28480 C357 0160 4791 FXD CER 10pF 5 100V 28480 C358 40WLV 40WHV NOT USED 80WLV 0180 4038 FXD ELECT 27000uF 16V 28480 80WHV NOT USED C359 40WLV 40WHV 0160 4831 FXD 4700pF 10 100VDC 28480 80WLV 0180 3798 FXD ELECT 4700uF 10 25VDC 28480 80WHV NOT USED Table 5 7 Output BoardParts List continued Desig Agilent Part Description Mfg Mfg No Code Part No C360 40WLV 40WHV 0160 4833 FXD CER 0 022uF 10 100V 28480 80WLV 0160 4835 FXD CER 0 1uF 10 50V 28480 80WHV 0160 4834 FXD CER 0 047uF 10 100VDC 28480 C361 40WLV
54. OHMS 28480 40WHV 80WHV NOT USED R516 NOT USED R517 40WLVAOWHV NOT USED 80WLV SOWHV 0683 4715 FXD FILM 470 5 1 4W 01121 CB4715 R518 40WLV 40WHV NOT USED 80WLV SOWHV 0757 0444 FXD FILM 12 1K 176 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 1212F R519 NOT USED R520 40WLV 0698 6983 FXD FILM 20 4K 40WHV 0698 7842 FXD FILM 21 6K 80WLV SOWHV NOT USED R521 40WLV 40WHV NOT USED 80WLV SOWHV 8159 0005 FXD FILM ZERO OHMS R522 40WLV 40WHV NOT USED 80WLV 0757 0397 FXD FILM 68 1 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 68R1F 80WHV 0698 4099 FXD FILM 139 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 8331F R523 40WLV 40WHV NOT USED 80WLV 80WHV 0683 1035 FXD FILM 10K 5 1 4W 01121 CB1035 R524 40WLV 40WHV NOT USED 80WHV 80WLV 2110 0712 FUSE SUBMIN 4A R525 40WLV 40WHV NOT USED 80WLV SOWHV 0757 0280 FXD FILM 1K 1 1 8W R526 40WLV 40WHV NOT USED 80WLV 80WHV 0811 0941 FXD FILM 75 5 10W 28480 R528 40WLV 40WHV NOT USED 80WLV 0698 6983 FXD FILM 20 4K 80WHV 0698 7842 FXD FILM 21 6K T301 06624 80091 XFMR PULSE 28480 TB1 0360 2195 BARRIER BLOCK 28480 U300 5060 3212 ASSY 5 amp 1826 0393 28480 U301 5060 3260 ASSY REG U302 5060 2942 ASSY 5 amp 1826 0393 28480 U303 1826 0527 IC VTL REG 28480 U304 309 NOT USED U310 311 1990 0996 IC OPTO ISO LED GATE 28480 U312 1820 4714 MICROCOMPUTER 28480 U313 1826 1488 IC DAC 28480 U314 1826 1231 IC D A 8 1 2 BIT 28480 5 21 Table 5 7 Output BoardParts List continued Desig Agile
55. Point Locations Table 4 4 Power On Self Test Error Messages Front Panel Display Message Explanation Troubleshooting Procedure TIMER FAILED The timer on the GPIB board failed Microprocessor U201 or real time clock U209 could be defective Perform GPIB board troubleshooting procedures see paragraph 4 18 The GPIB talker listener U202 on the GPIB is probably defective Perform S A test No 5 Table 4 10 The voltage DAC U313 P O 0315 on the specified output board probably failed Perform the output board troubleshooting procedures see paragraph 4 25 The current DAC U314 P O U315 on the specified output board probably Perform the output board troubleshooting procedures see paragraph 4 25 8291 FAILED CV DAC CH lt ch gt CC DAC CH lt ch gt OV DAC CH ch The overvoltage OV DAC U314 P O U315 on the specified output board probably failed Perform the output board troubleshooting procedures see paragraph 4 25 FUSE CH ch The output return fuse F303 on the specified output board is opened If error occurs again after fuse has been replaced the power module on the output board may be defective Perform the output board troubleshooting procedures see paragraph 4 25 The specified output board failed the GPIB board is defective or the cabling between the output board and GPIB board is defective Follow the board isolation procedures outlined in Figure
56. R345 ar 6425 C389 R430 P O v 3 CU CL CONTROL 7545 392 222 R426 2 0UT TERM R433 1K 2 21K 4 99K Mura 0467 R429 00 TERM HU0698 3279 6 81K 3 NOTE R434 TROGO 5 PUDE FERRITE BEAD L306 L307 GOES OVER 3 196 S A JUMPER ON THE BOARD fs s 1 ALTERNATE PART 2 1350 FOR R408 4 0348 2 P O 13 70 V CL CONTROL 5 gt e Figure 6 5 Output 1 amp 2 80W Board Schematic Diagram sheet 4 of 4 6 25 AppendixA LOGIC SYMBOLOGY The logic symbols used in this manual are based on ANSI IEEE Std 91 1984 or later which is a revision of ANSI Y32 14 The following paragraphs and illustrations provide a brief description of the symbology to aid in interpreting the symbols When referring to the symbols it should be remembered that 1 Power supply and ground connections usually are not shown on the symbols but are listed separately on the schematic 2 Items in brackets arenot part of the symbol but are included to help the user interpret the symbol 3 Unless arrows indicate otherwise inputs are on left outputs are on right and signal flow is from left to right 4 In an array of two or more identical elements only the first top element is shown in full detail 5 When shown individually on a schematic rather than as part of an array basic logic gates AND OR buffer are shown by distinctive shape outlines see Figure A 1
57. RM S noise to be out of specification d Adjust the load resistor to about 10 ohms so that the output voltage is close to 19 volts Check that the CC annunciator is on e Note that the reading on the rms voltmeter should be less than 10 mV equivalent to 1 RMS f Repeat this test steps a through e for each output in your supply 3 28 Performance Test Record All of the performance test specifications for the power supply listed are in Tables 3 4 and or 3 5 Table 3 4 covers the 40WLV and 80WLV outputs Table 3 5 covers the 40WHV and 80WHV outputs 3 29 EXTENDED TESTS These tests are similar to the Performance Tests except they have a much longer duration and are conducted with controlled temperature conditions 3 30 Output D rift The tests are divided into two parts short term and long term drift For all drift tests place the supply to be tested in a temperature chamber or in a temperature controlled environment such as a standards room 3 31 Short Term Voltage Drift Test This test measures the change in output voltage within the first 30 minutes of a change in the line voltage or the load a Turn off the supply and connect the output to be tested as shown in Figure 3 3 with the load switch closed and the short switch opened Connect the supply to the ac power line through a variable voltage transformer and adjust it for the nominal value b Turn on the supply and select the output to be tested OUTPUT SELECT key o
58. U312 S IT SHOULD BE 2 5 AT 4MHZ SEE FIGURE 4 108 OR 4 11R CHECK VOLTAGE LEVELS RT U312 25 26 27 PROBLEM CRUSED BY UNREG BIRS VOLTAGE BELOW ABOUT 18 5 MEDIUM RRIL VOLTRGE BELOW RBOUT 12V 4GWLV BOWLV 29 5V 4OWHV B NHV OR BIAS TRIP CIRCUIT DEFECTIVE U325 OR U327 CHECK U312 U327 C346 SEE FIGURE 4 18 CHECK 0310 ALSO CHECK 0312 21 FOR SHORT CHECK C324 2 CHECK FOR APPROX 23VAC ON EACH SIDE OF re BIAS WINDING TO T APPROX Ro cast REMOVE ZERO OHM RESISTORS R307 R328 R313 R314 CHECK ALL FOUR BIAS VOLTAGES REPLACE x OHM RESISTORS TO SERERE EROBLE BIRS OUTPUT CURRENT TYPICAL AND MAX CURRENT VALUES ARE LISTED IN THE TABLE ON SHEET 1 CHECK EXTERNAL CIRCUITS FOR SHORTS OR OVERLOADS Figure 4 9 Sheet 2 Output Board Troubleshooting 4 32 CHECK XFMR BIAS CABLE F308 AND F3 S SEE TABEL 4 2 CHECK REGURLTORS U300 U303 CHECK REGULRTOR RND RSSOCIRTED CIRCUITRY TURN SUPPLY OFF AND CONNECT S OHM 184 LORD ACROSS THE v AND OUTPUT TERMINALS TURN SUPPLY ON AND PROGRAM VOLTAGE TO 15V NOTE THAT CURRENT IS THE DAC SEE TROUBLESHOOT FIG 4 12 CHECK IF CR348 IS CONDUCTING CR348 CONDUCTING INDICHTES THE OUTPUT IS IN THE CC MODE CHECK IF CC ERROR AMPLIFIER INPUT U345 3 IS gt WITH RESPECT TO U346 2 Figure 4 9 Sheet 3 Output Board Troubleshooting 4 33
59. UPPER CHASSIS Figure 4 1 Agilent 6621A 6624A and 6627A Multiple Output Power Supplies Assembly Locations 4 3 Before you can remove output 3 located in the main chassis you must removethe GPIB board a Disconnect all cables Note the routing of cables if they must be removed since cable position may affect the output s ripple performance b Remove one ground screw located at rear of board near terminal block Retain the lock or flat washers for reassembly c Remove one ground screw located at extreme front of board Retain the lock or flat washers for reassembly d Remove two screws which hold the heat sink assembly to the chassis These must be removed completely e Slide the board slightly forward to disengage the keyed standoffs f Lift board out of chassis 48 80 Watt Output boards Models 6621A and 6622A each have two 80 Watt Output boards one mounted in the upper chassis and one in the lower chassis Model 6623A has one 80 Watt Output board which is mounted in the upper chassis assembly To remove an 80 Watt Output Board proceed as follows NOTE Before you can remove the output board located in the main chassis output 1 you must remove the GPIB board a Disconnect all cables Note the routing of cables if they must be removed since cable position may affect the supply s ripple performance b Remove two screws on rear of board c Remove two screws located near the front of the board
60. V signal that represents the output voltage magnitude which is also fed into S1 The O to 10 V signal is also sent back V READBACK to the 2 13 secondary interface to indicate the magnitude of the output voltage If the output voltage exceeds the programmed voltage the summing junction 51 goes negative causing U347 to produce a positive going CV control signal For this condition the base drive circuits will conduct more and pull current away from the power modules BASE DRIVE input via the DRIVE input line This will cause the power module s series regulators to conduct less and thus reduce the output voltage If the output voltage is less than the programmed voltage S1 goes positive causing U347 to produce a negative going CV control signal For this condition the base drive circuit will conduct less allowing more current to flow into the BASE DRIVE input This will cause the power module s series regulators to conduct more and thus increase the output voltage 2 44 Current Control Circuit When the output is operating in the constant current mode this circuit generates the CL control and the CL LOOP signals The control signal is applied through OR gate diode CR348 to control the base drive circuit in order to regulate the output current The CL LOOP signal is sent back to the secondary interface circuits to indicate that the output is in the constant current mode of operation The ON OFF signal received from
61. VIEN 999 9 200000 999 99 BA R 104 SA FOR AGILENT 6621A 6624A amp 6627A P O LINE MODULE _ P O 2 P O w2 P O LINE MODULE ON OFF 51 WHT GRY FEL m WHT BSN GRY gt VOLTAGE SELECTOR BOARD wore 2 b BLACK 4 b BLK GRN 4 L TO PRIMARY FOR AGILENT 6621 E FROM LINE MODULE Ti 14 45 war 10 VAC 10B ware TB 8B 100 14 VAC TD wwr RED 8 VAC 80 wnrzesu BVAC AC WHT VIO WHT RED VAC 8 VAC 128 24 VAC 138 warzecy 24 VAC GPIB BOARD SEE FIG 6 2 GPIB 4 ip P207 P208 OUTPUT BOARD 1 SEE FIG 6 3 P302 TO 204 ISOLATOR CIRCUITS TO _ INPUT FILTER AND P303 RECTIFIER TO BIAS SUPPLY CIRCUIT OUTPUT BOARD 2 SEE FIG 6 3 P302 TO P304 ISOLATOR CIRCUITS TO INPUT FILTER 23031 AND RECTIFIER TO BIAS SUPPLY CIRCUIT TO OUTPUT BOARD P302 TO OUTPUT BOARD 2 P302 FNOT USED F O W6 GND FROM GPIB BOARD P205 P O W7 4 DFS2 2 GND FROM GPIB BOARD 3 5v P206 4 DTS2 Figure 6 1 Power Distribution Schematic sheet 1 of 2 6 5 FOR AGILENT 6622 ra P O wa BLACK ORANGE 100 vac
62. a standards room a Turn off the supply and connect the output to be tested as shown in Figure 3 3 with the DVM connected across the current monitoring resistor the load switch dosed and the short switch opened b Turn on the supply and select the output to be tested OUTPUT Select key on the front panel c Program the current of the selected output to the Low Range Full Scale Current value and the output voltage to the Low Range Maximum Programmable Voltage value see Table 3 2 d Adjust the load until the output enters the CC mode with the displayed output voltage slightly less than the Low Range Full Scale Voltage value as read on the front panel display Check that the CC annunciator is on e Wait 30 minutes and record the output current DVM reading X 10 3 14 f Observe and record the output current reading periodically over an 8 hour period The difference between any two readings should be less than the value listed below for the particular output type tested Output Drift 40WLV 3 6mA 80WLV 7 2 mA 40WHV 2 64 mA 80WHV 5 28 mA g Repeat steps a through f for each output in your supply 3 35 TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT TC TESTS These tests check certain temperature coefficient specifications with the supply placed in a temperature controlled oven that provides an even temperature distribution The temperature is varied over the supply s operating range and changes in output voltage and current are measured The
63. across the output to continue down programming the output voltage below 2V Overtemperature Protection The power module also contains an overtemperature circuit that consists of a negative temperature coefficient thermistor that senses the power module s temperature When the power modules temperature rises enough to reduce the THERM input resistance to about 8 ohms the thermistor drops below 2 5 V approximately notifying the signal processor that an overtemperature OT condition has occurred The signal processor then relays this information to the microprocessor which will shutdown the particular output with the overtemperature condition The output will be restored 30 seconds after a safe operating temperature is reached Reverse Output Voltage Protection Diode The power module contains a diode with its cathode connected to the COLLECTOR output and its anode connected to the power module COMMON This diode is essentially connected across the power supply s output terminals to protect the output from having reverse voltages applied 2 39 Peak Current Limit This Q321 P 0340 and P O U341 plus P O U341 and Q325 on 80W output boards quickly limits the amount of current through the series regulator elements in the power module It is activated when the output current exceeds the full scale value about 75 in either the sourcing or thesinking direction The series pass regulator in power module U338 is connected
64. all devices on the bus must listen to the addresses and universal commands placed on the bus When ATN is false only devices that are addressed will actively send or receive data All unaddressed devices will ignore the data lines when ATN is false 2 9 System Micro Computer The system micro computer decodes and executes all instructions and controls all data transfers It consists of a microprocessor an address decoder RAM and ROM memories data buffers latches and a real time clock as shown in Figure 2 3 2 10 Microprocessor and Clock Circuits These circuits contain a high performance 8 bit microprocessor 0201 and associated clock circuits The microprocessor operates on a 1 MHz cyde which it derives from a 4 MHz ceramic resonator oscillator Y 201 The 1 MHz Q signal is generated by the microprocessor for use by the other circuits A 4 millisecond approximately clock signal applied to the miaroprocessor interrupt input enables the miaroprocessor to keep track of real time This allows the microprocessor to perform necessary tasks on a regular basis The real time dock signal is also used to keep track of the time that has elapsed since the output was last changed This enables the microprocessor to determine if a CV CC mode change occurred before the selected time delay see Reprogramming Delay discussion in Section V of the Operating Manual The microprocessor inhibits the OCP function until the delay is over The micr
65. attaching hardware disconnect the power cable leads at the transformer To avoid breaking the transformer tabs lugs do not bend the transformer tabs When disconnecting a lead pull the lead connector straight back from the tab When reconnecting a lead push the connector straight forward onto the transformer tab Do not flex the leads or tabs when making connections or disconnections When replacing the transformer refer to the label on the transformer to ensure you reconnect the leads correctly You can also refer to Figure 6 1 which shows all AC connections schematically for each of the models The fan and fan guard are secured to the chassis by mounting screws flat washers and nuts Remove this hardware disconnect the ac connector on the fan assembly and lift the fan from the unit Be sure to remove the AC line cord from the unit before attempting to work on theAC linemodule Table 4 1 Test E Oscilloscope Frequency Counter GPIB board uipment Required for Troubleshooting MEENENML TE Agilent 9825 85 or Series 200 Controller Power Supply and negative current limit Check clock signal waveforms and signal levels on GPIB and output boards Check operation of the RAM and ROM on the 00 os 100 W eee To remove the AC line module first disconnect all of the wires from it including the RFI capacitor Then use a screwdriver inside the unit to press the mounting clip on one side of the line module and
66. bi stable push control Both direct and alternating current N Caution hot surface n Protective earth ground terminal Out position of a bi stable push control ume Frame or chassis terminal On supply N Terminal for Neutral conductor on Off supply permanently installed equipment Terminal is at earth potential 1 Standby supply Used for measurement and control Units with this symbol are not completely circuits designed to be operated with disconnected from ac mains when this switch is one terminal at earth potential off To completely disconnect the unit from ac mains either disconnect the power cord or have a qualified electrician install an external switch Herstellerbescheinigung Diese Information steht im Zusammenhang mit den Anforderungen der Maschinenl minformationsverordnung vom 18 Januar 1991 Schalldruckpegel Lp 70 dB A Am Arbeitsplatz Normaler Betrieb Nach EN 27779 Typpr fung Manufacturer s Declaration This statement is provided to comply with the requirements of the German Sound Emission Directive from 18 January 1991 Sound Pressure Lp 70 dB A At Operator Position Normal Operation According to EN 27779 Type Test Edition2 September 2001 Copyright 2001 Agilent Technologies Inc 1 2 1 3 1 4 2 2 CONTENTS Section INTRODUCTION SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS EE 1 1 INSTRUMENT AND MANUAL IDENTIFICATION uu
67. can sink up to 2 2 A when its output voltage is above 10 V and up to 55 when the output is between approximately 2V and 10V U351 constantly monitors the output voltage in order to provide the proper reference voltage to the summing junction of U350 If the output voltage is in the high range the open collector output of U351 will be near ground thereby dividing down the VREF voltage to summing junction S3 resulting in a lower sink current limit 2 2 for a 40 W low voltage board If the output voltage is in the low range the collector output of U351 will be open resulting in a higher sink current limit about 5 5 A for a 40 W low voltage board R476 provides a small amount of positive feedback hysteresis to prevent jitter at the switch point 2 46 FET Downprogrammer When the output is sinking current and the output voltage drops below 2 0 V approximately the down programming characteristics current sinking characteristic are as shown in Figure 2 8 for each type of output board The FET Downprogrammer circuit Part of U351 connected across the output senses when the output falls below 2 5 V approximately and connects resistor across the output to aid downprogramming Notice that in Figure 2 8 on the 40W low voltage graph the 0 2 ohm slope relates to the saturated impedance of the current sink transistors the 7 5 ohm slope is due to the resistor R457 in series with FET 0342 and the 0 015 amps at VOUT equals
68. connected in parallel with U338 on 80WLV and 80WHV boards and has the same voltage levels and connections as U 338 see Figure 6 3 sheet 3 except that the OV GATE input pin 11 to 0339 is tied to common U338 and U 339 are matched pairs and should be replaced as such Agilent Part No 5080 2111 contains a matched pair of U338 U339 power modules 4 The Thermistor output pin 1 level of 4 5 V was measured at a temperature of 25 C Voltage decreases with a rise in temperature OVERTEMP occurs at approximately 2 5 V Table 4 18 Miscellaneous Trouble Symptoms Trouble Symptom See paragraph 3 15 for proper noise measurement technique Check dress of GPIB board cabling Check GPIB board and output board for loose ground screws Check for sense lead pick up see paragraph 4 12 in the Operating Manual Spikes on output Check for ripple on bias voltages or VREF voltages Check for about 2 5 V to 3 5 V on power module pins 5 to 8 when output voltage is programmed to full scale Ripple on output Poor transient response or oscillations on the output Check stable operating area with capacitive and inductive loads as given in Figures 1 4 through 1 6 of the Operating Manual Check output capacitors C416 and C417 Check compensation components tied to R420 for appropriate loop CV or CC Check power module compensation components between U338 U339 pins 2 and 5 and capacitor s between pi
69. delay capacitor see Figure 4 18 OUTPUT ENABLE pin 24 After PCLR pin 26 goes High and the power supply passes its self test the microcomputer U312 causes this pin to go Low With PCLR High and OUTPUT ENABLE Low ON OFF pin 25 goes High enabling the output With OUT ENABLE High ON OFF is Low and the output will not supply power ON OFF pin 25 This output pin goes High when PCLR pin 26 is High and OUTPUT ENABLE pin 24 is Low see Figure 4 18 When High the ON OFF line enables the control circuits and current sources of the output board which allows power to reach the output terminals PCLR pin 26 This output goes High when DELAY CAP pin 23 goes High see Figure 4 18 When PCLR is High and OUTPUT ENABLE pin 24 is Low ON OFF pin 25 goes High BIAS TRIP pin 27 See DELAY CAP pin 23 description Note that BIAS TRIP goes High when both the unregulated bias supply voltage and the medium rail voltage are high enough 15 V pin 28 The 15 V bias voltage can range from 15 55 V to 13 98 V 4 32 Troubleshooting Status Problems An output will report its operating status CV CC CC OV OT and UNR when queried to do so see paragraph 5 25 in the Operating Manual The front panel also indicates the present status of the output When an output appears to operate properly but incorrect or multiple status is reported the problem may be caused by the status monitor circuit section of U 327 microco
70. failure may not occur The following precautions should be observed when handling static sensitive devices a Always turn power off before removing or installing printed circuit boards or components b Always store or transport static sensitive devices all semiconductors and thin film devices in conductive material Attach warning labels to the container bag enclosing the device c Handle static sensitive devices only at static free work stations These work stations should indude special conductive work surfaces such as Agilent Part No 9300 0797 grounded through a one megohm resistor Note that metal table tops and highly conductive carbon impregnated plastic surfaces are too conductive they can shunt charges too quickly The work surfaces should have distributed resistance between 106 and 102 ohms per square d Ground all conductive equipment or devices that may come in contact with static sensitive devices assemblies Where direct grounding of objects in the work area is impractical a static neutralizer should be used ionized air blower directed at work Note that this method is considerably less effective than direct grounding and provides less protection for static sensitive devices f While working with equipment on which no point exceeds 500 volts use a conductive wrist strap in contact with skin The wrist strap should be connected to ground through a one megohm resistor wrist strap with insulated
71. following strings ISET ch gt 5 15 2 06 10 3 or 4 12 gt VSET lt ch gt lt 7 or 20 gt d Adjust the load for the Low Range Full Scale Current value see Table 3 2 as indicated on the front panel display The CV annunciator on the front pand must be on If itis not adjust the load down slightly Note that the waveform on the oscilloscope should not exceed 3 mV peak to peak Disconnect the oscilloscope and connect an rms voltmeter in its place The rms voltage reading should not exceed 500 pV Repeat steps a through f for each output in your supply Q 3 16 CV Down Programming Speed This test measures the time required for the output voltage to fall to 37 of the High Range Full Scale Voltage time constant Also measured is the time an output takes to change from full scale to zero volts and settle within the specified voltage settling band response time a Turn off the supply and connect the output to be tested as shown in Figure 3 4 b Turn on the supply and select the output to be tested OUTPUT SELECT key on the front pand 3 6 C d g set itself to the mum programmable current First program the selected output to zero volts by sending the string VSET lt ch gt 0 Using Channel A on the oscilloscope set the volts division switch to 5 V div 40WLV 80WLV outputs or to 10 V div 40WHV 80WHV outputs dc coupled and position the trace on the bot
72. in series with an external resistor R407 For 80W output boards the series regulator in the additional power module U339 is connected in series with external resistor R416 see Functional Schematic Figure 6 3 for details The peak current limit circuit for 80W boards indudes addtional transistors P O 0341 and Q325 to monitor the current through R416 When the voltage across R407 or R416 for 80 W boards exceeds a diode drop in either direction the peak current limit circuit is activated and limits the conduction of the series pass transistor element or current sink transistor This circuit reacts much faster than the or current control circuits See paragraph 2 44 When the peak current limit is activated in the current source direction not only will the conduction of the series regulator be limited but the current control circuit U346 will be quickly activated through P O U340 and R405 to take control of the current limiting action 2 40 Bleed Circuit This circuit Q341 R456 etc connected from V to 5 75 V provides a fixed current of about 15 mA 30mA in 80W boards through the series pass elements in the power module so that they are never completely turned off The bleed circuit is activated via the power on circuit when the ON OFF signal is high The bleed circuit maintains stability with large output capacitors under light loading conditions and helps to keep the output impedance constant 2 41 Sens
73. latches buffers interface with the 1 K bit serial EEPRO in which system constants are stored 2 17 Data Buffers These 3 state buffers U212 place the serial data from each output board and the EEPROM on the supply s system miarocomputer data bus lines when chip select CS3 is decoded Serial data from output boards 1 4 appears data bus lines 00 03 respectively and EEPROM serial output data appears on data bus line D7 Logic 0 s will always appear on data bus lines D4 D6 when CS3 is decoded because these buffer inputs are connected to COMMON buffer outputs are held in the high impedance state when CS3 is not decoded 2 18 Data Latches These stages 0213 edge triggered D type flip flops On the rising edge of the CS2 chip select the output of each stage will be set to the logic state that is present on the associated data bus line Data bus lines DO D3 are the serial data input lines for output boards 1 4 respectively Data bus line D4 controls the TIMER ENABLE signal line to the real time clock circuit D5 is the chip select line for the EEPROM D6 is the clock signal for the EEPROM and D7 isthe data input line for the EEPROM The data that is transferred between the GPIB board and the output boards up to 4 passes through optical isolators located on each output board 2 19 EEPROM This 1 K bit serial EEPROM electrically erasable programmable memory stores the power supply s GPIB address and model number as
74. lines are not TTL signals Check Table 4 16 for the voltage values that correspond to a particular input line being High or Low e Follow the procedures outline Figure 4 20 4 33 Power Module Signals Table 4 17 gives the function and typical signal levels at each pin for a properly operating power module s U338 on 40W output boards U338 and U339 on 80W output boards As indicated in the table the voltage levels were measured with the output voltage set to the maximum programmable value with no load connected to the output and at nominal line voltage 4 34 Miscellaneous Trouble Symptoms and Remedies Table 4 18 lists various trouble symptoms along with suggested remedies Most of the trouble symptoms are concerned with an output not meeting a particular specification Verification tests for all specifications are given in Section III of this manual Table 4 17 Typical Power Module U338 Voltage Levels U338 Reference M Emitter High Rail Medium Rail Bypass Low Rail Thermistor Note 4 Collector Output O V Bias Output Sense OV Gate Common Drive Drive 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Notes 1 Conditions Output Board J Output Board Voltage Note 3 V a Output voltage set to maximum programmable value 20 V or 50 V b No load on output c Nominal line voltage 2 Voltages are referenced to V or Common or another power module pin as indicated in the table 3 Power Module U 339 is
75. measures the change in output voltage resulting from a change in output current from full to no load a Turn off the supply and connect the output to be tested as shown in Figure 3 3 with the DVM connected between the 5 and S terminals the Load switch closed and the Short switch opened b Turn on the supply and select the output to be tested o D OUTPUT SELECT key on front panel Program the current of the selected channel to the Low Range Maximum Programmable current value and the output voltage to the Low Range Full Scale voltage value see Table 3 2 by sending the following strings ISET lt ch gt lt 5 15 2 06 10 3 or 4 12 gt VSET lt ch gt lt 7or 20 gt Adjust the load for the Low Range Full Scale Current value see Table 3 2 as indicated on the front panel display The CV annunciator on the front pand must be on If itis not adjust the load down slightly Record the output voltage reading on the DVM connected to S and 5 Open the Load switch and again record the DVM voltage reading The difference between the DVM readings in steps e and f is the load effect voltage and should not exceed 2 mV Repeat steps a through f for each output in your supply 4 CV Source Effect This test measures the change in output voltage that results from a change in ac line voltage from the minimum to maximum value within the line voltage specifications a b Turn off the supp
76. mmm 4 5 4 2 FUSGS p 46 4 3 Tests Performed IIE nennen hne EE tes hse tenth se tenete ne nene nennen 4 9 4 4 Power On Self Test Error Messages 0 10 ner ener nennen 4 10 4 5 ERROR Codes and Messages eee ies hene rente nns ee tese rne nene sene rennen rsen nn senes 4 11 46 GPBIB Board S A Test NO ptt M Ede P eve ope REN He Ede Ede 4 20 4 7 GPIB Board SA Test NOS SAATE e RR ME e ve bade Re E scat ER eese oer eR dore dudes eR ERI 4 21 48 GPIB Board S A Test hse tentes tite ieee Goch es aer re Mosen uqi e direi 4 22 4592 GPIB Board S A Test n ete we er ee o Ee sea te ae POSER AR EN ea 4 23 4 10 GPIB Bo rd S A Test N0 B eee Le Rd ees S 4 24 4 11 GPIB Board S A Test 6 2 0000 00000 sisse esse ese e ese ase ese ese ese sese sese eese EE EEE EE EH 4 25 4 12 GPIB Board SzA Testi NO o otto ob e ORO Het Dese rto Sor rated pt p 4 26 413 GPIB Board S A Test NO 8 e iba ark seul cas eo e Eee Mesa ena Ge RR Att 4 27 4 14 Keyboard Signal Paths eoe eet d a hase dita ted e 4 29 4 15 Microcomputer 0312 Signal Measurements During the Self Exercise ROUTING 4 49 4 16 Sig
77. of the W201 position error number 11 12 13 or 14 HDW ERR CH ch gt is generated and will be regenerated after the error is read since the problem still exists Table 4 4 lists all of the self test error messages that can appear on the front panel display when power is first turned on Each message is explained and a troubleshooting procedure is recommended This table is to be used in conjunction with Figure 4 6 and other troubleshooting flow charts provided in this section 4 16 Connector P201 Jumper Positions The GPIB board contains a connector P201 see Figure 4 2 with jumper positions that are used for normal operation of the power supply or troubleshooting The following discussion describes the function of each of four jumper positions NORM RUN This jumper position is used as the normal running position The two pins on P201 that W201 connects in this position are both tied to the GPIB board 5 V bias supply The jumper is simply stored in this position when not used in one of the other positions CAL LOCKOUT This position is an alternate to the NORM RUN position and is used to ensure against accidental calibration of the power supply With W201 in Error Message SELF TEST Position blank display blank display 8291 FAILED TIMER FAILED CV DAC CH ch CL DAC CH ch OV DAC CH ch FUSE CH ch HDW ERR CH ch HDW ERR CH ch 4 9 test skipped test skipped test skipped
78. output boards or to cabling 4 15 Power On Self Test The power on self test sequence performs tests on the GPIB board as well as on each output board in the supply Table 4 3 lists the tests the boards tested and the error message that appears on the display if a particular test fails Note that two of the output board tests the RAM and ROM tests are performed even when jumper W201 is installed in the SKIP SELF TEST position of connector P201 on the GPIB board see paragraph 4 16 The other eight tests are skipped not performed if W201 is installed in the SKIP SELF TEST position If any board fails power on self test the OUTPUT ENABLE line U312 22 is held high which keeps the ON OFF line U327 25 low For this condition the supply will not respond over the GPIB and none of the output boards will operate When W201 is installed in the SKIP SELF TEST position in service connector P201 on the GPIB board a circuit problem that could have been detected with the self test will no longer cause the GPIB board to prevent the outputs from operating Table 4 3 Tests Performed at Power On RAM Test ROM Test 8291 Timer CVDAC CLDAC OVDAC Fuse RAM ROM Note that error number 22 SKIP SLF TST is initially generated when W201 is in the SKIP SELF TEST position This error is cleared when read However if an output board fails the output board RAM or ROM tests which are performed regardless
79. push from inside the unit that side of the module slightly away from the chassis Finally use the screwdriver again to press on the mounting dip on the other side of the module and push that side out The module can be replaced simply by sliding it straight back into the mounting hole until the mounting clips spring into position securing the module The wires can be replaced according to the AC connections shown in Figure 61 4 12 TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED Table 4 1 lists the test equipment required to troubleshoot the power supply Recommended models are listed 4 13 FUSE REPLACEMENT Table 4 2 gives the rating of the fuses in the supplies The dip mounted ac line fuse is located in the line module on the rear of the supply The line module also contains a voltage selection card which must be set to the associated ac input 100 120 220 or 240 VAC Section II in the Operating Manual Agilent 5957 6332 explains how to change the line voltage setting The GPIB board has one fuse F201 as shown in Figure 4 2 The 40WLV Output board and 40WHV Output board fuse locations are shown in Figures 4 3 and 4 4 respectively The 80WLV Output board and 80WHV Output board fuse locations are shown in Figure 4 5 The fuses are shown schematically in Figures 6 1 through 6 3 in the rear of this manual Recommended Model Agilent 3456A Agilent 545A Agilent 1740A Part of Agilent 5005A or use an Agilent 5384A Location Ref
80. refer you to other troubleshooting charts Figure 4 11 to 4 16 to continue troubleshooting Figures 4 10 and 4 11 illustrate waveforms on the output card to you troubleshooting Figure 412 provides troubleshooting procedures when a problem has been isolated to one to the DAC amplifier circuits on the defective output board Figures 413 through 416 provide troubleshooting procedures for various trouble symptoms which may be encountered In addition to the troubleshooting flow charts described above subsequent paragraphs in this section contain special troubleshooting information for some of the complex circuits on an output board Troubleshooting information is included for Analog Multiplexer U323 Signal Processor U327 Power Module U338 U339 and Microcomputer 0312 4 26 Test Setup The following test setup allows you to access the components on the output board and perform the troubleshooting procedures a Disconnect the line cord b Gain access to the output board as described in paragraphs 4 3 through 4 5 c Make sure that jumper W201 P201 and W202 jumper pack on the GPIB board are installed in their normal run positions See Figure 4 2 d Check that S is connected to V and to V on the output terminal block e Connect the line cord S is connected 4 27 Post Repair Calibration if the output board is replaced the associated output channel must be recalibrated as described in Appendix A of the Operating
81. remove power from the supply s outputs 57200 770 NI 1486354 LON 38H gt NH 509508 170170 lt NOLLdO 4 1 BU m w DH 513 235 b 1 SOMOS 179170 033701 E Sud mca uc 1811 33 595 22 URAN LNBs Ast 020 SOLOS 019 OL AS ET rasa wx T GE i i 4 gt 224 5 SCHOE LNALNO ot LLL OL ES unc zren 8 40 80 8 10 20 lt ae 3 40 80 8 40 80 8 20 00 zien 1 080 E ian 1 080 Mu bip Clay WOY 8 X Agi 852 Sgen 31034020801M 31545 40 20 9 2 va 8 PEDAL TOMLNODDRHSONH 8140 an 2021 8189 L J Figure 2 3 GPIB Board Block Diagram 53701402 5033 01 2 6 2 24 OUTPUT BOARD The following paragraphs provide block diagram level descriptions of the output board The descriptions cover the four output board types 40WLV 40WHV 8OWLV and 80WHV Differences between the board types are given as required Figure 2 1 shows which output board types are used in each model The descriptions that follow are divided into two main block diagram discussions Secon
82. supply is left in the oven for 30 minutes to ensure stability Note that the test equipment eg current monitor resistor DVM load etc is located outside of the oven 3 36 Output Voltage and Readback Voltage TC a Turn off the supply and connect the output to be tested as shown in Figure 3 3 with the DVM connected across the 5 and S terminals the load switch closed and the short switch opened b Turn on the supply and select the output to be tested OUTPUT SELECT key on thefront pand c Program the current of the selected output to the High Range M aximum Programmable Current value and the output voltage to the High Range Full Scale Voltage value see Table 3 3 d Adjust the load for slightly less than High Range Full Scale Current as read on the display Check that the CV annunciator is on Set the temperature chamber to 30 degrees C and allow 30 minutes for the output to stabilize f Record the output voltage on the g Readback the output voltage over the GPIB and record the value h Increase the temperature to 40 degrees C and allow 30 minutes for the output to stabilize i Repeat steps f and g Note the difference between the values read before and after the temperature change The difference between the output voltage DVM readings should be less than 16 mV for 40WLV 80WLV outputs or less than 40 mV for 40WHV 80W HV outputs The difference the readback voltage should be less than 21 mV for 40WLV
83. terminal The instrument and this manual should be reviewed for safety markings and instructions before operation Refer to the Safety Summary page at the beginning of this manual for a summary of general safety information Safety information for specific procedures is located at appropriate places in the manual 1 3 INSTRUMENT AND MANUAL IDENTIFICATION Agilent Technologies instruments are identified by a two part serial number i e 2601A 00101 The first part of the serial number the prefix is a number letter combination that denotes either the date of manufacture or the date of a significant design change It also indicates the country of manufacture The first two digits indicate the year 25 1985 26 1986 etc the second two digits indicate the week and the A designates the U S A The second part of the serial number is a different sequential number assigned to each instrument If the serial number prefix on your power supply differs from that shown on the title page of this manual a yellow Manual Change sheet supplied with the manual defines the differences between your supply and the supply 1 2 described in this manual The yellow change sheet may also contain information for correcting errors in the manual 1 4 FIRMWARE REVISIONS The Read Only Memory ROM chip inside of your supply is identified with a label that specifies the revision of the supply s firmware see paragraph 4 24 Section PRINCIPLES O
84. the secondary interface circuit must be on about 2 V in order to activate the current control circuit The current control circuit compares the output current to a programmable reference voltage CL REF that represents the programmed current value This comparison produces the CL control signal In order to make this comparison the circuit monitors the voltage I MON across current monitoring resistor R408 This voltage drop represents the amount of output current The 1 and CL REF signals are connected through scaling resistors to summing point S2 for application to U346 CC Error Amplifier as shown in Figure 2 6 Based on this summing action U346 generates the CL control signal which is applied to the base drive circuit via OR gate diode CR348 to control conduction of the series regulators in the power module in the same way as described above for the voltage control circuit The 1 signal is also amplified and sent back to the secondary interface to indicate the magnitude of the output current The current control circuit receives an input from the peak current limit circuit in the current sourcing mode only as shown in Figure 2 5 When the peak current limit circuit see paragraph 2 39 is activated it immediately limits the conduction of the series regulators in the power module and also notifies the current control circuit to take control of the current limiting action 2 45 Negative Current Limit Circuit
85. the 8 bit DO D7 data bus Bits D4 D7 are transferred into DAC bit positions 0 3 when the microcomputer sets the DAC signal low and bits 00 07 are transferred into DAC bit positions 4 11 when the microcomputer sets the DAC A B signal high 2 29 Current and Overvoltage DACs These DACs are contained in a dual 8 bit DAC 0314 The DAC A B signal determines which DAC receives the data on the data bus Bits 00 07 are transferred into the current DAC when DAC Bis low and into the overvoltage DAC when DAC A Bishigh The amp bit current DAC part of 0314 and amplifier 03158 convert the digital input into an analog signal CL REF in the range of 0 to 10 V This signal is used as a reference voltage and is sent to the current control circuit see paragraph 2 44 to set the output current to the programmed value The 8 bit overvoltage DAC part of U314 and amplifier U315C convert the digital input into an analog signal OV REF in therange of Oto 10 V This signal is compared with the output voltage and will shut down the output when the output voltage exceeds the programmed OV see paragraph 2 22 The CL REF and OV REF signals are also sent to the analog multiplexer so that they can be measured during power on self test 2 30 Analog Multiplexer The analog multiplexer 0 323 selects one of eight inputs 0 to 10 V to be applied to the readback signal comparator for the A D converter The selected signal is determi
86. to 6 48 V CLO pin 18 This open collector output signal takes on the state of the internal 4CC flip flop when STATUS SELECT pin 11 is Low Figure 4 19 shows the conditions that cause CLO to be Low The CC mode is indicated when CLO is Low CLO is open circuited when STATUS SELECT is High CVO pin 19 This open collector output signal takes on the state of the internal CV flip flop when STATUS SELECT is Low Figure 4 19 shows the conditions that cause CVO to go Low The CV mode is indicated when CVO is Low CVO is open circuited when STATUS SELECT is High CL LOOP pin 20 This input signal when High indicates that the supply s output is in the positive current limit Figure 4 19 shows how this signal is decoded causing CLO pin 18 to go Low CV LOOP pin 21 When the supply s output is in the CV mode the voltage level of this input signal should fall within the medium level see Table 4 16 A High level at pin 21 indicates that the output is unregulated Figure 4 19 shows how the CV LOOP signal is decoded causing CVO pin 19 to go Low 4 52 Common pin 22 Along with pin 5 this is a common return for the bias supplies DELAY CAP pin 23 When BIAS TRIP pin 27 is High this signal causes a slow charge of an external dday capacitor toward the DELAY CAP High level which when reached causes PCLR pin 26 to go High When BIAS TRIP is Low this signal causes a quick discharge of the external
87. 0 0303 2110 0716 2110 0767 2110 0383 2110 0767 2110 0303 Table 4 2 Fuses continued Location Ref Desig Description Agilent Part No 80WHV Output Board Fig 6 3 Sheet 3 F300 F301 F302 F303 F304 F305 F306 F308 F309 Not used Bleed circuit and downprogrammer circuit fuse Output return fuse Secondary ac input fuses Secondary ac input fuses 0 25 A 125 V 8 A 250 V 8 A slo blo 8 A 250 V 2 A slo blo 2110 0763 2110 0383 2110 0383 2110 0383 2110 0303 Bias AC Input Fuses NOTE The GPIB troubleshooting procedures in this section apply only to earlier through hole board assemblies Surface mount GPIB assemblies are not repairable to the component level If defective the entire GPIB assembly must be replaced DISPLAY VOLTAGES 2 2V 11V 33V P204 AC BIAS 12 W201 STORED IN 5V NORMAL RUN POSITION ON P201 45V PCLR SIGNAL J201 GPIB vw CONNECTOR CLOCK J203 J202 c 9999999 9000092 99999 end 0000000998Co 0000 7 4203 J202 w202 NORMAL RUN POSITION Q TIMER EN SIGNAL EEPON P203 P205 208 OPTO PON SIGNAL DISPLAY OUTPUT BOARD SIGNAL CONNECTORS Figure 4 2 GPIB Board Fuse and Test Point Locations 4 7 YYYY P302 TO FROM GPIB vna 555 sd T 29999 005005 E dc 99999 uz 229990 ds 5550050 CR sit vy 055080001 Ww s 9999 60
88. 0 END NOTE Thetested output s CV annunciator should remain on at all times whilethetest is in progress h Observe Channel A on the oscilloscope and adjust for a stationary waveform by using Channel A as the trigger source set to trigger on a positive edge Be sure to trigger as dose as possible to the time when the output voltage just begins to rise On Channel A observe the output voltage transition from the scope s bottom horizontal line to the High Range Full Scale Voltage Look for a smooth exponential waveform with no kinks or aberrations Perform a time constant check by insuring that the output voltage rises to about 63 of the High Range Full Scale Voltage in less than 250 usec 40WLV 80WLV outputs or 750 us 40WHV 80WHV outputs Refer to the Channel A waveform shown in Figure 3 7 Now observe Channel on the oscilloscope while maintaining the trigger on Channel asin step h Note the series supply bucks out the Full Scale Output Voltage and that the waveform is clamped at approximately 0 6 V and rises to the top horizontal line when the output voltage is at full scale The diodes see Figure 3 6 prevent gross overload of Channel B which is set at 50 mV division allowing examination of the tail of the exponential waveform The output voltage should be within 20 mV of itsfinal settling value on the top horizontal line is less than 2 msec for 40WLV 80WLV outputs and within 50 mV in less than 6 msec
89. 0180 4037 40WHV 80WHV 0180 4038 80WLV 0180 4036 C362 40WLV 40WHV 0160 4833 FXD CER 0 022uF 10 100V 28480 80WLV 0160 4835 CER 0 1uF 10 50V 28480 80WHV 0160 4834 FXD CER 0 047uF 1076 100VDC 28480 C363 40WLV 0180 4137 40WHV 80WHV 0180 4139 80WLV 0180 4037 C364 40WHV 0180 4137 40WLV 80WLV 0180 4038 80WHV 0180 4036 C365 40WLV 0180 4137 80WLV 0180 4037 40WHV 80WHV NOT USED C366 0180 0374 FXD ELECT 10uF 1076 20VDC TAN 56289 150D106X9020B2 C367 0160 4832 FXD CER 0 01uF 10 100VDC 28480 C368 40WLV 40WHV 0180 0393 FXD ELECT 39uF 10V 1076 TAN 56289 150D396X9010B2 80WLV 80WHV 0180 1838 FXD ELECT 75uF 16 10 ALUM 56289 30D756G016CC2 C369 0160 4833 FXD CER 0 022uF 10 100V 28480 C370 0180 0393 FXD ELECT 39uF 10V 10 TAN 56289 150D396X9010B2 C371 0160 4835 CER 0 1uF 10 50V 28480 C372 0160 4830 FXD CER 2200pF 10 100VDC 28480 C373 40WLV 40WHV NOT USED 80WLV 80WHV 0160 4814 FXD CER 150pF 576 100V 28480 C374 NOT USED C375 40WLV 40WHV 0180 3804 FXD ELECT 47uF 35V 28480 80WHV 80WLV NOT USED C376 40WLV NOT USED 40WHV 80WLV 0180 3804 FXD ELECT 47uF 35V 28480 80WHV C377 40WLV 40WHV NOT USED 80WLV 80WHV 0180 3804 FXD ELECT 47uF 35V 28480 C378 40WLV 40WHV NOT USED 80WLV 80WHV 0180 3804 FXD ELECT 47uF 35V 28480 C379 40WLV 40WHV NOT USED 80WLV 80WHV 0160 4281 FXD METPA 2200pF 2076 250VDC 28480 5 10 Table 5 7 Output BoardParts List continued Desig A
90. 08 4000 C411 3300PF SOU P O TB1 10 36 LM393 HU0160 6836 R481 HU 15U 047UF 01 2500 28 7 6515 0757 509 n 15K 0451 HU0757 0460 24 3K R479 61 9K HU0698 4493 4 34K VAN CR352 20K 1 150 CL TOGGLE R421 10K CR353 C406 R464 220PF 28 7K 40K SENSE 2 4 0UT TERM ANN 1000 14645 po P O 181 15 36 5K 35U R w C286 R422 95K C405 1800PF 1M 2U 1000 BNZORE R484 xU 7 CR346 1 aK HU0160 4807 20k R423 C387 C398 C397 R469 33PF 1000 1 d R453 1 5159 100 01 15 8K 3000PF 015 U REF 1 1009 d 500 1000 LU0160 4822 1000PF 100U y 7U 2 F302 LU0160 6836 01 2509 ai 0 5A Q341 2 Hv2110 0343 2508 6455 FET DOWNPROGRAMMER 2007 TERM 1744 R457 S j DAC BUFFER gt 340K 2200PF gt HV ONLY Rie U REF 1 CL CONTROL 1009 LV0811 2553 1000 1 c 7 9 28 c R355 LV0160 4833 1744 DRIVE SINK 022 1009 BLEED SINK BLEED CIRCUIT 212456 cL LOOP SIUE 2 630 HUPURCH 01535 CU DAC 0 TO 10V 2200PF 63U U Figure 6 3 Output 1 amp 2 Board Schematic Diagram sheet 3 of 4 CURRENT SOURCES R382
91. 0WLV 0699 0107 FXD FILM 4 75K 1 28480 40WHV 80WHV 0698 6360 FXD FILM 10K 1 28480 R483 40WLV 80WLV 0683 7515 FXD FILM 750 5 1 4W 01121 CB7515 40WHV 80WHV 0683 2225 FXD FILM 2 2K 5 1 4W 80031 CR25 1 4 5P 2K R484 0699 0118 FXD FILM 20K 1 28480 R485 40WLV 80WLV 0698 8093 FXD FILM 40K 1 1W 01281 MAR5 1T16 4002B 40WHV 80WHV 0699 1211 FXD FILM 95K 1 28480 R486 40WLV 80WLV 0699 0107 FXD FILM 4 75K 1 28480 40WHV 80WHV 0698 6360 FILM 10K 1 28480 R487 40WLV 80WLV 0683 7515 FXD FILM 750 5 1 4W 01121 CB7515 40WHV 80WHV 0683 2225 2 2K 5 1 4W 80031 CR25 1 4 5P2K2 R488 40WLV 80WLV 0698 3449 FXD FILM 28 7K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 2872F 40WHV 80WHV 0757 0460 FXD FILM 61 9 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 6192F R489 490 0686 1065 FXD FILM 10M 5 1 2W 01121 EB1065 R491 0683 0475 FXD FILM 4 75 1 4W 80031 CR25 1 4 5P4E7 R492 0686 2225 FXD FILM 2 2K 5 1 4W 01121 EB2225 R493 0757 0430 FXD FILM 2 21K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 2211F R494 0698 3430 FXD FILM 21 5 1 1 8W 28480 R495 0757 0447 FXD FILM 16 2K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 1622F R496 0757 0401 FXD FILM 100 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 101F R497 0683 3915 FXD FILM 390 5 1 4W 80031 CR25 1 4 5P 390E R498 0757 0401 FXD FILM 100 1 1 4W 28480 R499 40WLV 80WLV 0757 0446 FXD FILM 15K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 1502F 40WHV 80WHV 0698 4493 FXD FILM 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 10 3402F R500 40WLV 40WHV 0757 0404 FXD FILM 130 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 B T0 1
92. 1 TROUBLESHOOT GPIB BOARD SEE PARA 4 18 TO DCTERMINE IF GPIB BOARD OR DISPLAY IS DEFECTIVE IF THE ERR ANNUNCIATOR IS ON REFER TO TABLE 4 5 IF THE CV AND CC CV AND UNR OR CC AND UNR ANNUNCIATORS ARE ON FOR A PARTICULAR OUTPUT CHANNEL T THE APPLICABLE TROUBLESHOO OUTPUT BOARD SEE PARR 4 25 SEE POWER ON SELF TEST ERROR MESSAGES TABLE 4 4 NOTE THAT IF THERE ARE DAC OR FUSE ERROR MESSAGES TROUBLESHOOT THE APPLICABLE OUTPUT BOARD SEE PARA 4 25 TURN OFF THE SUPPLY AND EXCHANGE THE SERIAL DATA CABLES RT GPIB BOARD END BETWEEN THE BAD OUTPUT AND GOOD OUTPUT BOARD THEN TURN ON THE SUPPLY AND REPEAT THIS TEST FROM THE START CHECK IF HDW ERR CH N 7 APPEARS RGRIN ON THE SAME CHANNEL NO CHECK POWER TRANSFORMER T1 AND AC CABLE TO GPIB BOARD CHECK CABLE IF CABLE OK TROUBLESHOOT THE OUTPUT BOARD SEE PARA 4 25 Figure 4 6 Sheet 2 Initial Troubleshooting and Board Isolation 4 16 SET UP THE GPIB BOARD FOR TROUBLESHOOTING SEE 4 19 AND TURN ON THE SUPPLY CHECK THE 5V BIRS VOLTAGE AT P281 2 IF THE DISPLAY DOES NOT WORK CHECK THAT THE FRONT PANEL DISPLAY OPERATING VOLTAGES AT R219 ARE RS FOLLOWS R219 9 3 3V R219 2 2 2V Re19 15 1 1V USE FREQ COUNTER AND SCOPE CHECK THAT 201 13 AND 201 14 ARE TTL 1 2 2 SIGNALS USE SCOPE TO CHECK THE PCLR U222 14 OPTOPON 205 3 AND EEPON 0222 8 SIGNALS OBSERVE EACH SIGNAL RS YOU CYCLE POWER THE PCLR
93. 1 I 2 3 CC DAC 0 TO 10U 50 eos 59 C329 UREF A o CE aC O 0514 ISOLATED 3mm d 500 560 17 upp 00 14080 RFB A DC1 13 081 D a 12 OU DAC 0 TO 10U DC3 11 DB3 Dra 10 084 DCS 9 DC6 085 067 2 086 1 C330 Uy 59 DB AGND Ty 74CR309 gt 1900 DAC A B DAC A B R338 15 25 B 19 9312 5 11K 16 gt CS2 WR MC6805P2 5 1 28 PCLR DGND USS RESET 2 UREF B SINT 4 900 27 EXTAL PAZ 25 1U323 PCLR STATUS RESET pn 24 STATUS RESET 2 23 DISABLE POU DISABLE 22 OUT ENABLE lt 2 4 21 QUT ENABLE NUM 1 57 2 TIMER PAO FUSE STICK 19 002 I U READBACK R328 PCO pge 18 D 6 50 PCi 5 27 DS R328 FOR MC68205 pac L0lpce paa 26 D 4 C355 25 11 bog pgz 15 DC2 C381 14 DC2 4200PF R337 1009 PBL 15 DC0 PBO 816 sA 511 i 2390 R363 0525 DG508A E T 1230LCD R340 50 EN si DGND NN 52 6 4 99 53 7 S4 U312 At 80 11 REF a2 ee 57 10 R343 R342 525 ANN ANY 23 3K 20K 1x 150 U Ax SHUNT AMP C3 2 5 50 A 2 C344 Sio 15U 15U NOTES UNLESS OTHERHISE SPECIFIED 00 100 1 ALL RESISTOR VALUE ARE IN OHMS 1 1 8W BC pantera sind 2 ALL CAPACITOR VALUES ARE IN MICOFARADS 5 DENOTES TERM NOT Segre qa 4 HU DENOTES HIGH VOLTAGE Figure 6 3 Output 1 amp 2 Board Schematic Diagram sheet 1 of
94. 13 U216 15 U216 17 U213 3 U213 4 OUTPUT BOARDS U213 7 INTERFACE U213 8 DATA LATCHES U213 13 U213 U213 14 U213 17 U213 18 4 22 Table 4 9 GPIB Board S A Test No 4 Description This test checks Data Buffers U212 p o the Output Boards Interface Circuit which send data back to the System Microcomputer from the Output Boards Test Setup Use the test setup described in paragraph 4 23 Connect jumper pack W202 in the normal operating position and set up the signature analyzer as shown below Signature Analyzer Edge P201 PIN Input Setting Connection START 11 STOP 12 CLOCK 17 GND 4 Measurements Use the data probe to take signatures for each circuit at the input and output pins listed below Circuit Input Signature Output Signature 5V P201 1 3U9F U212 2 U212 3 3U9F U212 4 U212 5 0000 OUTPUT BOARD U212 6 U212 7 0000 INTERFACE U212 8 U212 9 0000 DATA BUFFERS U212 11 U212 12 U212 U212 13 U212 14 U212 15 U212 16 U212 17 U212 18 4 23 Table 4 10 GPIB Board S A Test No 5 Description This test checks the GPIB Talker Listener chip U202 bidirectional data bus lines Test Setup Use the test setup described in paragraph 4 23 Connect jumper pack W202 in the normal operating position and set up the signature analyzer as shown below Signature Analyzer Edge P201 PIN Input Setting Connection START 11 STOP 12 CLOCK 15 GND 4 Measurements Use the data probe to take signatures for each circuit at the
95. 15 V t lt 0 4 0 8 V 0 3 V t lt 0 4 V lt 0 4 V lt 4 4 V 0 25 V 1 gt 0 10 mV gt 2 4 V gt 1 95 0 25 V 1 gt 8 Vor gt 11 V gt 2 4 gt 2 4 gt 2 4 gt 2 4 gt 2 4 gt 2 6 V 0 4 V gt 2 8 V 0 3 V gt 2 4 gt 0 85 V 0 25 V gt 2 4 V gt 2 4 gt 4 2 V 0 25 LOW lt 44 V 0 25 V 1 MEDIUM gt 42 V 0 25 V 1 or lt 0 85V 0 25 V t HIGH gt 0 95 0 25 W t lt 6 7 V 1 3 V lt 0 4 lt 6 7 V 0 8 V 0 3 V gt 6 7 V 1 3 V gt 2 4 V gt 1 7 V gt 2 4 V gt 0 85 V 0 2 V ov ov 0 0V 0V 14 V 0V ov ov 0V 1V 2 35 V 0V 6 5 V 7 42 ov ov 6 08 V 7 5 V ov 0V ov 7 42 V ov ov 5 23 V 10 mV 5 23 V 5 V pulse 0 14 V 5 23 15 66 5 23 5 23 V 5 23 5 23 V 5 23 5 1 V 5 23 V 15 66 6 48 V 5 23 5 23 2 5 V 2 5 NOTES 1 Signal levels are referenced to common 2 ndicates that the stated voltage threshold depends upon the value of the 7 V nominal supply For example if the value of the 7 V supply is actually 7 1V 0 1V lower than 7 V then the LOW value given for pin 25 would read lt 68V which is 0 1 V lower than 6 7 V See OV DRIVE pin 6 description in paragraph 4 30 Minus one diode drop 1 Indicates that hysteresis is involved in the trip voltage level and a transition from
96. 19 FXD FILM 3 9K 28480 R387 0698 4123 FXD FILM 499 1 1 8W 28480 R388 0683 4715 FXD FILM 470 5 1 4W 01121 CB4715 R389 40WLV 40WHV 0698 5088 FXD FILM 12K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 10 1202 80WLV 80WHV 0757 0444 FXD FILM 12 1K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 10 1212F R390 40WLV 40WHV NOT USED 80WLV 80WHV 0757 0404 FXD FILM 130 1 1 8W 28480 R391 0757 0442 FXD FILM 10K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 10 1002F R392 0757 0282 FXD FILM 221 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 221RF R393 0698 4435 FXD FILM 2 49K 1 1 8W 28480 R394 0757 0473 FXD FILM 221K 176 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 2213F R395 0757 0431 FXD FILM 2 43K 1 1 8W 28480 R396 0757 0200 FXD FILM 5 62K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 5612F R397 0757 0481 FXD FILM 475K 1 1 8W 80031 5033R 1 8T04753F R398 40WLV 40WHV 0757 0280 FILM 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 1001F 80WLV 80WHV 0757 0419 FXD FILM 681 1 1 8W 28480 R399 0757 0464 FXD FILM 90 9K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 9092F R400 0757 0442 FXD FILM 10K 1 1 8W 28480 CT4 1 8 T0 1002F R401 40WLV 80WLV 0757 0397 FXD FILM 68 1 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 68R1F 40WHV 80WHV 0698 4099 FXD FILM 139 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 10 8331F R402 8159 0005 FXD FILM ZERO OHMS R403 NOT USED R404 0757 0429 FXD FILM 1 82K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 10 1821F R405 0698 5089 FXD FILM 33K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 10 3302F R406 40WLV 40WHUV 0683 4715 FXD FILM 470 5 1 4W 01121 CB4715 80WLV 80WHV 0683 2025 FXD FILM 2K 5 1 4W 28480 R407 40WLV 80WLV 0811 3751 FXD RES 07 5 2W 28480 40
97. 1K SHOTTKY LU ONLY GND R503 C440 C429 W 21 56 ex HU ONLY Te200PF 2200 2200 2200 FIXED 0 9 CIRCUIT WY Figure 6 5 Output 1 amp 2 80W Board Schematic Diagram sheet 2 of 4 6 23 REMOTE OV TRIP 2 gt 00 TERM bon uae ae 10V R509 C433 1 gt 330 0252 0 80 Jig CL LOOP DEN 1 R487 SENSE ____________________ R438 1 R441 R443 750 5x P O TB1 MN NNN WNN 1744 15 14 7K 1K 1 1K 1 ELS HY0683 2225 R442 1 44 CU CL CONTROL 1 5M 8 25K e HV0757 0199 SENSE PROTECT CIRCUIT 3 N4l5 7 CR348 R446 at SK P O 6 N U REF 1 0541 P O 1 2 8 15 8K 9 R483 SENSE 1 AAA 4 A 750 5x CR349 ON OFF PRZE M R435 2 4 gt 4 2 2K 5 1744 R512 14645 C394 330 C434 HU ZZPF 12 0757 0280 1000 1K JE OUT TERM lt m SHUNT s Peet I 4 CL LOOP 150K 2 DD R420 ANN DRIUE i VS CU FEEDBACK VOLTAGE LOOP CU CL CONTROL 2 cu LOOP 0UT TERM C395 m 015 M id R480 2482 SHUNT 1009 500 ANN SENSE 40K 1 409 2522 0 1 HU zl Ax 15K HU0698 6260 v HU0698 449z 99271 00 10K 1 R454 EA R488 5 95K 1 HU0160 5410 25 3300PF 500 u REF 1 R477 is HU0757 0460 5R491 ah WA NW ON OFF Cas 61 9K 47 P i 6800PF pa
98. 2 6881 Asia Pacific Agilent Technologies 24 F Cityplaza One 1111 King s Road Taikoo Shing Hong Kong tel 852 3197 7777 fax 852 2506 9284
99. 2 7 Typical Output Range Characteristics 2 15 404 LOW VOLTAGE AMPS LOW VOLTAGE 1 2 Vout VOLTS 22377 2 5 2 8 1 5 1 8 5 Tour AMPS HIGH VOLTAGE 1 2 Vout VOLTS AMPS HIGH VOLTAGE Figure 2 8 Typical Downprogramming Characteristic Below 2 0 V If the output voltage from V to V exceeds the programmed overvoltage setting derived from OV REF the overvoltage comparator signal OV COMP will activate OV DRIVE and fire the SCR provided that the POV DISABLE signal is low The CURRENT COMP signal is included in the comparison to compensate for the voltage drop across the current monitoring resistor and permit an accurate comparison The POV DISABLE signal is high only during power on and for a brief time during an overvoltage reset Note that the OV DRIVE signal is also sent to the OV terminals via diode CR356 and transformer T301 to either notify a remote circuit that the overvoltage circuit was tripped or alternatively to fire other output boards up to eight by paralleling the external OV lines The OV TRIP 2 16 signal can activate the OV DRIVE and shut down the supply regardless of the state of the POV DISABLE signal As shown in Figure 2 9 OV TRIP is the output of a wired OR signal can gate and can be activated by either the SENSE PROTECT signal as described in paragraph 2 41 or by the REMOTE OV TRIP signal The REMOTE OV TRIP signal can be generat
100. 251 5385 3 5 cz LxA x8 RM x8 RKB Re Ex 1 5 SEN Sida IPR Sida SEN SER SEN 6 ly mo P206 Y ne 4 a NC 8 oN SR 59 oN SN SN SN oN SN y PE gt GND pi M Ai 4 m AL LOCKOUT NC g 3 3 O 290 290 290 290 290 290 290 290 290 z9 4206 NL1251 5385 17 3 SKIP SELFTE T 1 POST 1 CONN ON 5 25 25 595 585 585 ses 585 585 585 2585 585 285 8 3 8 ab dap rand 3 6 P 18 Y GE gt u 16 HEADER 15 KEYBOARD 74 541 8 e 10 __ 1206 NSLS lt B 13 12 U215 U219 9208 9202 0280 203 283 0212 0214 0282 4959 0493 4 P206 DTS ROME k 0 Nga ri A EY s 5 4207 NL1251 5385 z 0214 9505 M 8 ZS 7 4 295 1252 2493 DFS 5 9382 18 16 S lt m J207 NL1251 8385 Seer 20 44 BRE p 3 e e 20 8 12 13 VCC 8 1252 2493 P207 GND 9 VCC 57 11 U203 U202 4207 1251 5385 45V 204 x 4 7 m 9 __ 75ALSI60 24 9914 49 0213 og 1252 2493 P207 5 2 01087 J201 B8 08 35 208 0072 4 Z4ABT574 8 m p 8205 16 TS ROWS 0107 1252 2820 5 8 B7 07 DIO7 D1 De OE 5755 4 5 NL1251 5385 g EF D 0106 14 7 B6 De 36 pig pe 16 55 11 cp TOSS 1252 2493 P207 DTS 8 vec 13 6 5 37 15 D4 e NL1251 5385 Qo Do m LEE U282 D105 B5 D5 DIOS 0930 ci or 4 1980 5041 78ALS1085 a
101. 31 F 80WLV 80WHV 0757 0399 FXD FILM 82 5 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 10 82R5 R501 40WLV 40WHV 0757 0404 FXD FILM 130 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 131 F 80WLV 80WHV 0757 0397 FXD FILM 68 1 1 1 8W 28480 R502 0757 0283 FXD FILM 2K 1 1 8W 28480 R503 40WLV 80WLV NOT USED 40WHV 80WHV 0757 0199 FXD FILM 21 5K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 901F R504 0683 1035 FXD FILM 10K 5 1 4W 28480 R505 NOT USED R506 0757 0280 FXD FILM 1K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 10 1001F R507 0683 0475 FXD FILM 4 7 5 1 4W 80031 CR25 1 4 5P4E7 R508 0686 1065 FXD FILM 10M 5 1 2W 01121 EB1065 R509 40WLV 80WLV 0698 5663 FXD FILM 330 1 1 8W 28480 40WHV 80WHV 0757 0280 FXD FILM 1K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 1001F R510 40WLV 80WLV 0757 0441 FXD FILM 8 25K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 8251F 40WHV 80WHV 0757 0199 FXD FILM 21 5K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 901F R511 40WLV 80WLV 0683 2725 FXD FILM 2 7K 5 1 4W 80031 CR25 1 4 5P2K7 40WHV 80WHV 0698 4480 FXD FILM 15 8K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 1582F R512 40WLV 80WLV 0698 5663 FXD FILM 330 1 1 8W 28480 40WHV 80WHV 0757 0280 FILM 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 1001F 5 20 Table 5 7 Output BoardParts List continued Desig Agilent Part Description Mfg Mfg No Code Part No R513 40WLV 80WLV 0757 0446 FXD FILM 15K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 101F 40WHV 80WHV 0698 4493 FXD FILM 34K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 3402F R514 0698 6631 FXD FILM 2 5K R515 40WLV SOWLV 8159 0005 FXD FILM ZERO
102. 342 110V 120V LINE FUSE 8A 250V 28480 2110 0055 220 240V LINE FUSE 4A 250V 28480 51 3101 2862 ON OFF SWITCH 28480 T1 6621 9100 4645 BIAS POWER TRANSFORMER 28480 6622 9100 4490 BIAS POWER TRANSFORMER 28480 6623 9100 4646 BIAS POWER TRANSFORMER 28480 6624 9100 4561 BIAS POWER TRANSFORMER 28480 6627 9100 4592 BIAS POWER TRANSFORMER 28480 Table 5 5 Agilent 6621A 6624A Multiple Output Power Supplies Parts List continued Desig Agilent Part Description Mfg Code Mfg No Part No Chassis Cabling W1 8120 1348 LINE CORD ASSY 28480 W2 5060 3272 XFMR TO AC SWITCH 28480 W3 5060 3110 FAN WIRE ASSY 28480 WA 5060 3264 XFMR ASSY PRIMARY 28480 W5 5060 3271 GPIB BIAS 28480 W6 28480 6621 22 8120 5174 GPIB OUTPUT BD 28480 6623 24 27 8120 5177 GPIB OUTPUT BD 28480 W7 6621 22 23 TPPNR 18433 GPIB OUTPUT BD 28480 6624 27 TPPNR 18431 GPIB OUTPUT BD 28480 W8 6621 22 NOT USED 6623 24 27 8120 5175 GPIB OUTPUT BD 28480 W9 6621 22 23 NOT USED 6624 27 8120 5176 GPIB OUTPUT BD 28480 W10 6621 23 24 5060 3267 XFMR POWER 7V 5A 28480 6622 27 5060 3268 XFMR POWER 20V 2A 28480 W11 6621 5060 3267 XFMR POWER 7V 5A 28480 6622 5060 3268 XFMR POWER 20V 2A 28480 6623 24 27 5060 3269 XFMR BIAS 28480 W12 6621 6622 5060 3269 XFMR BIAS 28480 6623 5060 3273 XFMR POWER 7V 5A 28480 6624 5060 3265 XFMR POWER 7V 5A amp BIAS 28480 6627 06627 80006 XFMR POWER 20V 2A a
103. 39 CHECK U327 OUTPUT VOLTRGE HELD SEE FIG 4 15 OUTPUT HELD HIGH HIGH TROUBLESHOOTING CHECK COMPONENTS CONNECTED TO U327 2 CHECK U34 C U341C SENSE PROTECT CIRCUITS CHECK 4327 SEE PARA 4 30 OUTPUT VOLTAGE MAY BE SET TOO CLOSE TO OV TRIP POINT OR THERE MAY BE AN OVERSHOOT RT POWER ON SEE TROUBLE SYMPTOMS TRBLE 4 18 Figure 4 13 Sheet 2 Overvoltage Troubleshooting Flow Chart 4 43 THE OUTPUT VOLTAGE IS HELD LOWER THAN THE PROGRAMMED VALUE AFTER THE VOLTAGE AND CURRENT HAVE BOTH BEEN PROGRAMMED UP THROUGHOUT THIS TROUBLESHOOTING CHART BE SURE TO SET THE OUTPUT TO THE CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH IT WAS OBSERVED TO BE HELD LOW TURN OFF SUPPLY AND CHECK FUSIBLE RESISTOR R40 AND R416 ON 8QW OUTPUTS IF OPEN REPLACE AND ALSO CHECK R4 6 CAND R413 ON B K OUTPUTS AND R420 WITH SUPPLY OFF MAKE SURE THERE IS NOT A SHORT ACROSS THE OUTPUT THE OUTPUT SHOULD LOOK LIKE A DIODE CATHODE ON V IN PARALLEL WITH RESISTOR SHOWN HERE OUTPUT RESISTORUD TURN ON SUPPLY IF THE BIAS REFERENCE AND RAIL VOLTAGES HAVE NOT BEEN CHECKED DO SO NOW AS DESCRIBED IN FIG 4 3 SHEET 1 CHECK CVDAC AMPLIFIER U313 U3ISR SEE FIG 4 12 CHECK CLDAC AMPLIFIER U314 U315B SEE FIG 4 12 CHECK THAT THE ON OFF SIGNAL RT U327 25 15 av NO THERE MAY BE HARDWARE ERROR ON THE OUTPUT BEING TESTED SEE FIG 4 9 SHEET 1 YES CHECK U327 CR331 CR333 SEE FIG 4 18 Figu
104. 3A 2 lt P70 aa 9336 5 HU CONN 6 6 CR325 71 N P303A 3 P70 P303B 3 RO 9336 10 10 R388 1 309 HV CONN HS LU ONLY 470 15335 LU PURCH 01533 5 9 5 220UH 7 1906 0255 HU0686 47225 1 24 5 1 1 4 7K 5x 1 2 108 8 HU2110 0685 lt X 362 l 1 0 15 R389 ZSNCR326 0356 12 12K R405 1022 X 3 R383 13 2 j b 13 33K 365 8386 P303A 4 lt Fo 5 14 maa 2400 18000 EH Roa R402 L302 F409 1 82K HU CONN rm F306 LU LU ONLY 6225 1K NW 2 R387 P 0 14 PURCH 01547 0 82UH 48 24 P303A 5 12000 350 WE HU9100 1640 LU ONLY 499 0541 50585 HU2110 0685 KSK care 13 HU CONN C364 R368 oe L301 R375 a R403 RE 159 0005 PA rm NU 42 ie 5 12000 AE 0 HV ONLY 0 1 OHM 400UH aU rw m 105 1 24 i R R367 45345 HU9140 1160 _ HU0686 2225 PURCH 01545 800UH ae eee 2 2K 5 1 24 24000 160 HV1902 3323 0 in NE TRA 9521 42 29 LU ONLY 10K R406 MED RAIL U338 1 HU ONLY 4 AWN 4 POWER MODULE a rado R410 470 5 CR329 C371 R396 HIGH RAIL EMITTER 1744 AAA R385 MED RAIL BYPASS 5 2N4032 200 1 10K 5 62K ZCR318 22 5 REF CR362 CR331 Su 15 LOW RAIL COLLECTOR HV ONLY C372 BASE DRIVE OUTPUT R407 ipse 5 DRIUE 0UT SENSE 7 2200PF CR327 QV BIAS THERM C375 02 5 1009 Bea N core cien 12 3 Si 416 C412 490 5 HU0811 2752 25 NZCRZ24 ZW 4 18 5 2W a 1 2 HU0812 0010 350 CR333 CR328
105. 4 E a C369h6 R381 0 GHOR33d 2 2558 5 8332 0 2 G R397 0 21832270 R396 H Lo 55221 6 EEO O1c371 0 0468329 G urzot o o R405 o HcR334 0 CR34 R406 6 9 18395 6 Ese e Rzo4pe 0570 R323 O 404 R391 0 gRzog o Ra 8595 L 0520 0319 r
106. 4 6 10 F308 UNREG BIAS P301 1 lt 2A HSS WW gt 50 A 7525500 SZCR301 5369 BIAS CKT 500 R302 LM317T 150 022 100U CR303 R305 CR302 P301 2 Y A 5242 F309 T R301 C302 C304 C311 C305 P301 3 lt 4 7 a R306 2755304 2A 5 T2700 10 1 1 715 0 1 Trek 2 61K 1 1724 500 500 350 350 500 350 350 4 5 C315 R300 5504 R303 R311 HP34 4800 1 3K 4 2 C308 499 4 7 2200PF 1 24 63U 1 350 55 259 56 R304 R316 1 a p 121 1 5x A 1 44 1744 0505 R314 I a 7U LM337T 0 R313 15U QU DAC 0 TO 10U 0 gt SHUNT AMP 1 5 gt 1 peor 2025 OUT ENABLE 0 1 gt HU0699 0020 REF 1 1 4 p gt DISABLE 3 16M R365 R366 R358 R357 R356 MED RAIL 4 gt AV ANN 2 1 5 10K 54 9 75K 50 50 5 50 5 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 HU0698 4539 x HV0699 1212 4 14 R359 R361 tout TERM U REF 1 19K 1x HOSTER 14 p 0 14 14 114 14 14 14 14 e o 14 P o 14 Po 14 P 0 14 P O ET 1 3 7326 0326 0326 0326 0326 0326 0326 0326 0326 0326 0326 0326 0326 35 65K 0 98305 UNREG BIAS 20 0K 44 20 0 S 20 0 lt 20 0 S20 0K lt 20 0 lt 20 0 lt
107. 4 58 Section V REPLACEABLE PARTS 5 1 INTRODUCTION This section contains information on ordering replacement parts Tables 5 5 through 5 7 list all of the electrical and mechanical components for the power supply Each entry in these tables includes the following information a Reference designator Refer to Table 5 2 b Agilent Technologies part number c Description of Part Refer to Table 53 abbreviations d Manufacturer s federal supply code number refer to Table 5 4 for manufacturer s name and address e Manufacturer s Part Number Table 5 5 lists the circuit board assemblies cables and electrical components within the chassis of the power supply Table 5 6 lists all of the electrical and mechanical components on the GPIB board This board is identical in models 6621A 6624A and 6627A Table 5 7 lists all of the electrical and mechanical parts the 40 Watt Low Voltage 40WLV 40 Watt High Voltage 40WHV 80 Watt Low Voltage 80WLV and 80 Watt High Voltage 80WHV output board types The abbreviations 40WLV 40WHV etc are used in table 5 7 to show the differences between the four output board types The output board configuration for each model is given in Table 5 1 below Table 5 1 Output Board Configuration Output Model 5 2 HOW TO ORDER PART You can order parts from your local Agilent Technologies sales office Refer to the list of sales offices at the back of the manual for the offic
108. 4 6 HDW ERR CH ch If all three messages appear the readback circuit is probably defective 4 10 BIAS AC 23VAC 46 VAC P303 304 SECONDARY AC HIGH RAIL MEDIUM RAIL U339 POWER ofc ag L o o EERS 199 99 i 1 2 8855055 J 00000000 99 o5 V 413 U J 00099900000000 00000005050000 RU ROR ud 09900 055080858 n 90900000009000 5 000000097 op by 2 3 f P302 TO FROM GPIB j 85666550585588 e e F308 309 F304 306 F305 LOW RAIL 5 MODULE ca EE Se pres SB a 00000000000000 5 y 900900008 99250 9 CES 9 5585054 000000 Lion ge 2 k S 0 O S40V Figure 4 5 80WLV 80WHV Output Boards Fuse and Test Point Locations Message ERR key Programming Errors NO ERROR INVALID CHAR INVALID NUM INVALID STR Table 4 5 ERROR Codes and Messages Error Code ERR query Explanation and Remedy Indicates there are no errors You sent a character that the supply did not recognize The format of your number string is incorrect Check syntax see Section V in the Operating Manual You sent a command that the supply did not understand Check command summary see Appendix C in the Ope
109. 40 END The computer should display the revision date e g 2629 Note that the signatures in Table 4 7 GPIB Board S A Test No 2 for the ROM are for revision A 02 and will be different for different revisions The signatures for the previous revision 1 01 are given in Appendix A in the back of this manual TURN OFF THE SUPPLY DISCONNECT ALL LOADS AND CONNECT S TO V AND S TO V TURN ON SUPPLY CHECK LINE FUSE F1 LINE VOLTAGE SWITCH SI AND FAN Bl SEE FIG 6 1 USING FRONT PANEL CONTROLS SELECT AN OUTPUT CHANNEL AND PROGRAM THE OUTPUT VOLTAGE AND CURRENT WITHIN THE ACCEPTABLE RANGE OF THE OUTPUT CALIBRATE THE OUTPUT SEE APPENDIX IN THE OPERATING MANUAL DID NO TROUBLESHOOT THE OUTPUT BOARD SEE PARA 4 25 FRIL YES USING AN GPIB CONTROLLER PROGRAM OUTPUT CHANNEL CHECK AC INPUTS TO THE OUTPUT en gt BOARDS SEE FIG 6 1 VOLTAGE AND RERDBRCK THE NO lt gt CHECK TRANSFORMER T1 AND CABLES ves OUTPUT VOLTAGE TROUBLESHOOT THE GPIB BOARD SEE 4 18 CHECK HP IB CABLE IF CABLE IS OK TROUBLESHOOT THE GPIB BOARD SEE PARR 4 18 YES TEST COMPLETED IF AN OUTPUT HAS PROBLEM NOT COVERED BY THIS TEST REFER TO TRBLE 4 18 Figure 4 6 Sheet 1 Initial Troubleshooting and Board Isolation 4 15 HDW ERR CH N 8231 FRILED TIMER FRILED CV DAC CH Ov DAC CH FUSE CH N CC CH CHECK THAT RC INPUT TO GPIB BORRD IS x 12VRC SEE FIG 6
110. 40WHV or 80WHV outputs as indicated on your supply s front panel and note that the sink current Is changes from the previous value to a value within the range indicated below Neg CurrentLimit High Range Output V Output DVM Reading X 10 40NLV 2 25 to 2 55 A 80WLV 4 5 to 51A 40WHV 0 9to 1 02A SOWHV 21t025A i Repeat this test steps a through h for each output in 3 24 Negative Constant Current CC Operation This test verifies the readback and display accuracies when the your supply 3 11 260018 VOLTMETER POWER SUPPLY CURRENT 3 v 15R MONITOR RESISTOR 0 O Figure 3 12 Negative Current Limit CC Readback Accuracy 3 25 CC Load Effect This test measures the change in output current for a change in the load from High Range Full Scale Voltage to short circuit a Turn off the supply and connect the output to be tested as shown in Figure 3 3 with the DVM connected across the current monitoring resistor the load switch closed and the short switch opened b Turn on the supply and select the output to be tested OUTPUT SELECT key on the front panel c Program the current of the selected output to the High Range Full Scale Current value and the output voltage to the High Range Maximum Programmable Voltage value see Table 3 3 by sending the following strings ISET lt ch gt lt 2 8 or 4 gt VSET lt ch gt lt 20 2 or 50 5 gt d Adjust the load for High Range Full Scal
111. 4713 MCI4020BCP U210 1820 3848 IC FF CMOS D TYPE 04713 MM74HCT374N U211 1820 1427 IC DCDR TTL LS 2 TO 4 LINE 01295 SN74LS156N 5 7 Table 5 6 GPIB Through hole Board Parts List continued Desig Agilent Part Description Mfg Mfg No Code Part No N74LS244N N74LS374PC N74LS244N N74LS32N N74LS244N N74LS374PC M309K N74LS04N M393N WN 212 1820 2024 IC DRIVER TTL LS OCTAL 213 1820 1997 FF TTL LS D TYPE 214 1820 2024 IC DRIVER TTL LS OCTAL 215 1820 1208 IC GATE TTL LS OR QUAD 216 1820 2024 IC LINE DRIVER TTL LS OCTAL 217 1820 1997 FF TTL LS D TYPE 218 1820 0430 IC V REG 4 8V 5 2V RANGE 219 1820 1199 IC INVERTER TTL LS 220 1826 0412 IC COMPARATOR PRCN DUAL 221 1818 3921 EEPROM 1K 222 1858 0032 XSTR ARRAY 14 PIN PLSTC DIP LM3146 223 229 NOT USED VR201 1902 1377 DIO ZNR 6 19V 2 PD 4W W201 1258 0189 JUMPER REF W201 W202 1251 4782 JUMPER REF J202 Y201 0410 1627 CERAMIC RESONATOR NNN mu GG GEGG GE Mechanical Parts GPIB Board 1205 0366 HEAT SINK REF U218 5080 2101 ROM LABEL REF U206 0515 0886 SCR MACH M3X0 5 REF U218 0535 0004 NUT HEX DBLCHAM REF J201 2190 0584 WASHER LK HLCL REF U218 2 2190 0584 WASHER LK HLCL J201 2 0380 1679 STDF HEX HEAD REF U218 0570 0639 STUD STD PRS IN GPIB BD Table 5 6B GPIB Board Parts List surface mount assembly Design Agilent Part Description
112. 56055 9009 vn e 0500550 2999 220099208 28 8 d 8 8 E P301 BIAS AC 23VAC 46VAC P303 SECONDARY AC F300 301 F304 307 ve Rz DEN 6655060 9 4 ki asi ja T oj uj an t s dit HS 00000000000000 Figure 4 3 40W Right Hand Output Board Fuse and Test Point Locations 4 14 INITIAL TROUBLESHOOTING AND BOARD ISOLATION PROCEDURES Initial troubleshooting procedures for the power supply are given in the flow chart of Figure 4 6 The procedures first ensure that an ac input failure is not causing the problem and that the supply passes the power on self test The normal power on self test indications are described in Section III of the Operating Manual If the supply passes self test the procedures check to see if each output channel can be programmed from the front panel and from the GPIB controller and if calibration is required If the supply passes all of these tests you are referenced to a table at the end of this section that lists various troubles and remedies not covered by the flow chart If the supply does not pass self test as indicated by a blank display the flow chart isolates the problem to either an ac input problem a defective GPIB board or a defective display If the supply does not pass self test as indicated by a power on self test or ERR message theflow chart isolates the 4 8 problem to the GPIB board one of the
113. 80WLV NOT USED 40WHV 80WHV 1902 1392 DIO ZNR 30V 2 PD 4mW 28480 VR317 389 NOT USED For the SOWLV and 80WHV boards U338 and U339 are matched pairs The part number listed contains both U338 and U339 5 22 Table 5 7 Output BoardParts List continued Desig Agilent Part Description Mfg Mfg No Code Part No VR390 40WLV 80WLV 1902 0766 DIO ZEN 18 2V 5 PD 4mW 28480 40WHV 80WHV 1902 3323 DIO ZEN 42 2V 28480 Y300 0410 1627 CERAMIC RESONATOR Mechanical Parts 0380 1704 STDF RIVET REF U334 335 0515 0906 SCR MACH 7 REF HEAT SINK 0515 0981 SCR MACH 7 REF U334 335 0515 0885 SCR MACH M4X0 7 REF U338 MOD TO HS REF U339 MOD TO HS 0515 0906 SCR MACH 7 REF U338 HS TO PCB REF U339 HS TO PCB 0515 0910 SCR MACH 7 REF MOD HS M4X8L 0535 0023 NUT HEX DBL CHAM REF 0388 TO PCB 1200 0181 INSUL XSTR REF Q321 325 1205 0282 HEAT SINK REF LM317 REF U302 1205 0707 HEAT SINK REF U301 REF 0340 REF Q341 1205 0350 HEAT SINK REF U300 1205 0766 HEAT SINK REF U335 2190 0586 WASHER LK REF U338 4 REF HS TO PCB 2 REF U335 TO HS 1 REF OUTPUT BD 2 PER 2110 0269 FUSE CLIP REF F304 F308 F309 3050 0893 WASHER FLT REF U334 2190 0421 WASHER FLT REF U338 339 5040 1672 BUSHING REF U338 339 7120 8214 WARNING LABEL REF U338 339 5 23 Section VI CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS 6 1 INTRODUCTION This section contains functional schematic diagrams and co
114. 80WLV outputs or less than 50 mV for 40WH V 80WHV outputs j Repeat steps a through i for each output in your supply 3 37 Output Current and Readback Current TC a Repeat steps a through d of paragraph 3 33 Set the temperature chamber to 30 degrees and allow 30 minutes for the output to stabilize c Record the output current DVM reading X 10 d Readback the output current over the GPIB and record the value e Increase the temperature to 40 degrees C and wait 30 minutes for the output to stabilize f Repeat steps c and d Note the difference between the values read before and after the temperature change The differences should not be more than those listed below for the particular output being tested Current Current Readback Output TC Spec TC Spec 40WLV 10 mA 6 25 mA 80WLV 20 mA 12 5 mA 40WHV 4 2 mA 2 4 mA 80WHV 8 4 mA 4 9 mA 3 15 g Repeat steps a through f for each output in your supply 3 38 Negative Current Limit CC Readback TC a Repeat steps a through d of paragraph 3 24 b Set the temperature chamber to 30 degrees C and allow 30 minutes for the output to stabilize c Record the negative current limit value DVM reading x 10 d Readback the current over the GPIB and record this value e Increase the temperature to 40 degrees C and wait 30 minutes for the output to stabilize f Repeat steps c and d Note the difference between the values read before and after the temperature change
115. 8W 28480 R336 0698 3279 FXD FILM 4 99K 1 1 8W 28480 R337 338 0757 0438 FXD FILM 5 11K 1 1 8W 28480 R339 NOT USED R340 0698 3279 FXD FILM 4 99K 1 1 8W 28480 R341 NOT USED R342 0699 0118 FXD FILM 20K 1 1W 28480 R343 0698 8494 FXD FILM 23 3K 1 28480 R344 0757 0442 FXD FILM 10K 176 1 8W 28480 CT4 1 8 T0 1002F R345 40WLV 8159 0005 FM FILM ZERO OHMS 28480 80WLV 0698 3265 FXD FILM 118K 1 1 8W 28480 40WHV 80WHV 0699 0070 FXD FILM 3 16 1 1 8W 28480 R346 0698 5579 FXD FILM 5K 5 1 8W 28480 R347 0698 3329 FXD FILM 10K 5 28480 R348 0698 6533 FXD FILM 12 5K 1 28480 R349 0698 7929 FXD FILM 9 09K 1 28480 R350 0757 0283 FXD FILM 2K 1 1 8W 28480 R351 0698 4493 FXD FILM 34K 1 1 8w 24546 CT4 1 8 T0 3402F R352 0757 0439 FXD FILM 6 81 1 1 8W 28480 R353 354 40WLV 40WHV USED 80WLV 80WHV 0686 2405 FXD FILM 241 2W 28480 R355 40WLV 40WHV 0698 3328 FXD FILM 8 25K 5 28480 80WLV 80WHV 0698 3493 FXD FILM 4 12K 1 1 8W 28480 R356 0698 8913 FXD FILM 1 5M 1 1 8W 28480 R357 40WLV 80WLV 0699 0056 FXD FILM 15K 1 1W 28480 40WHV 80WHV 0699 0489 FXD FILM 16 15 1 28480 R358 40WLV 0699 0088 FXD FILM 1 21M 1 1 8W 28480 80WLV 0698 3215 FXD FILM 499K 28480 40WHV 80WHV 0698 4539 FXD FILM 402K 1 1 8W 28480 R359 40WLV 80WLV 0699 0934 FXD FILM 35 65K 1 1W 28480 40WHV 80WHV 0699 1211 FXD FILM 95K 1 28480 R360 40WLV 80WLV 0757 0451 24 3K 1 1 8W 28480 40WHV 80WHV 0757 0446 FXD FILM 15K 1 1 8W 24546
116. 9 PA RESP FAM 0206 Y201 Eos uni og 25105 203 44 4 595 x 2 REN pos ae z m 12 py vor 13 po Mm 21 4 TAL KIRO 52 2 e 1251 8105 6 m ms iret Fe 21417 ttl ay 14 Di M 10 E 5208 H e EXTAL RD xg cs 1 op NRFD1 35 15 be TS 95 gt 30 pag TXD z NZ NDACI 7 7 779 17 p A2 Terg 29 wo 2 9 6 5 1 04 25 5E ag 8 56 8 598 2 PA1 18 0 Do Qo Log Log DAV m Bl ay vos 18 D4 7 a 28 PD2 314 18 FS FES 7 4 GUARD 19 EOI EOI 5 7 5 vos 19 bs n 7 98 4 7 2258 0259 CONN 5 3 AS A5 e PAS 20 BR D2 8 8 16 PIN AG 6 20 D6 PD4 82 35 p 5 6 39 sn 12 16 17 oi ag 5 PAM pos 2 gt 98 EE DISPLAY 8 SRQ AT vos T Br 4_ udo 7 158 6 p4 Q4 HEADER 5 34 og AB GI M 14 os 7 ans comg 1 4 18206814 n OG w A 5 oo 13 Dao 2 A8 s PAG RESET 2 DS aud pi 14 ES 5 se AX PA7 D6 GND ATES 158 AAA 1 14 par A9 MODA H R256 sy w 9 2 10 85 A10 cs2 C ik pa 15 ato 24 An e hol D7 a7 25 WE 29 3 DQ2 og A8 A8 mops 07 1820 8461 2 B 11 WE 0699 1318 18 27 3 C 1K N V ay 2 4 1 11 Ce GR A9 A9 3 0699 1318 GND 57 NZ A12 NC1 p 19 3 At2 acra 14 Do V DQ4 A12 Trg 37 A10 10 28 lt lt 8 0219 4 D
117. AND OPTOPON SIGNAL ARE HELD LOW FOR APPROX 0 1 SECOND BEFORE RISING TO SV THE EEPON SIGNAL IS HELD LOW FOR 9 1 SECOND THEN BECOMES TRAIN AND THEN FLOATS CHECK THE RAM AND ROM BY MERSURING THE TIMER ENABLE SIGNAL RT 201 11 Figure 4 7 Sheet 1 GPIB Board and Front Panel Troubleshooting 4 17 SET UP FOR S A TESTING SEE PARA 4 23 PERFORM S A TESTS i THROUGH 8 SEE TABLES 4 6 THROUGH 4 13 CHECK MICROPROCESSOR 0281 ADDRESS DECODER U288 U215 U213 CHECK ROM 0206 DATA LATCHES 4212 CHECK DATA BUFFERS 0216 AND DATA LATCHES U213 IN OUTPUT BOARDS INTERFACE CHECK BUFFERS U212 IN OUTPUT BOARDS INTERFACE CHECK TRLKER LISTENER CHIP u282 CHECK DATA BUFFERS U216 AND DATA LATCHES U21 IN FRONT PANEL INTERFACE CHECK DATA BUFFERS 0214 IN FRONT PANEL INTCRFRCE CHECK DATA BUFFERS U214 KEYPAD ON FRONT PANEL SEE TABLE 4 14 IF ALL TESTS ARE OK BUT THE FRONT PANEL DISPLAY DOES NOT WORK THE DISPLAY ITSELF IS PROBABLY DEFECTIVE GPIB TRANSCEIVERS 4283 ARE NOT TESTED CONSEQUENTLY IF S A TEST NO S IS OK BUT YOU CANNOT PROGRAM OVER THE GPIB 0203 OR U2Q2 IS PROBABLY DEFECTIVE Figure 4 7 Sheet 2 GPIB Board and Front Panel Troubleshooting and Board Isolation 4 18 t000000000000 1000000000000 99999999 Eb J203 J202 NOP POSITION JUMPER PACK W202 IS INSTALLED J203 J202 FOR S A TESTS 1 AND 2 ees eg
118. Appendix A of the Operating M anual 32 TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED Table 3 1 lists the equipment required to perform the tests in this section The tests are performed by sending commands to and receiving data from the supply under test via the GPIB An Agilent 9825 85 or series 200 computer is used as the GPIB controller Tests that do not verify readback via the GPIB can also be performed manually from the supply s front panel and consequently do not require use of a controller CAUTION The tests should only be performed by qualified personnel During the performance f these tests the output o f the supply being tested may reach voltage levels above safe levels 3 3 OPERATION VERIFICATION TESTS To assure that all outputs of your supply are performing properly without testing all specified parameters perform the test procedures outlined a Perform the turn on and checkout procedures given in Section 111 of the Operating Manual These procedures include a power on self test b Perform the performance tests listed below on each output of your supply Voltage Programming and Readback Accuracy paragraph 3 12 CV Load Effect paragraph 3 13 CV Noise paragraph 3 15 Overvoltage Protection Tests paragraph 3 20 Current Programming and Readback Accuracy paragraph 3 23 CC Load Effect paragraph 3 25 3 4 PERFORMANCE TESTS 3 5 Introduction The following paragraphs provide test procedures for verifying the su
119. CHECK IF THE OUTPUT CAN SINK CURRENT SEE PARA 3 24 TURN SUPPLY OFF AND CONNECT AN EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY ACROSS THE V AND OUTPUT TERMINALS SEE FIG 3 12 TURN ON BOTH SUPPLIES AND SET THE EXTERNAL SUPPLY TO SV AND ITS CURRENT LIMIT TOP 1 5 TIMES THE LOW IS LIMITED TO 1 1 TIMES THE LOW RANGE FULL SCALE CURRENT CHECK IF CR354 IS CONDUCTING TO INDICATE CC MODE CHECK IF C ERROR AMPLIFIER INPUT 0350 3 IS lt WITH RESPECT TO 0358 2 CHECK CR354 FOR OPEN ADJUST EXTERNAL SUPPLY UP TO 12V FOR LOW VOLTAGE OUTPUTS OR 26 FOR HIGH VOLTAGE OUTPUTS CHECK IF THE SINK CURRENT IS 931 1 TIMES THE HIGH RANGE CHECK FET 0342 P O 4351 SEE FIG 4 20 Figure 4 9 Sheet 4 Output Board Troubleshooting 4 34 THE SUPPLY AND CONNECT FROM U312 2 ONE SIDE COMMON THIS CAUSES THE UNIT TO GO INTO A TEST LOOP SEE 4 28 AND DISPLAY HDW ERR SEE NOTED DISCONNECT THE JUMPER AND CYCLE THE LINE VOLTAGE TO RETURN TO NORMAL OPERATING MODE DURING THIS TEST BOTH THE OUTPUT VOLTAGE AND CURRENT LIMIT ARE SIMULTANEOUSLY PROGRAMMED TO FULL SCALE VALLES BE SURE THAT NO LOAD OF ANY KIND 15 CONNECTED TO THE OUTPUT TERMINALS CHECK 312 SEE TABLE CHECK FOR SHORT CIRCUIT ON DEFECTIVE LINE S CHECK THE OUTPUT OF THE RERDBRCK DAC RT 0315 14 IS RS SHOWN IN FIG 4 1 R OR 4 11R CHECK THAT SIGNAL AT U323 8 IS AS SHOWN IN FIG 4 1 G OR 4 116 CHEC
120. CT key on the front pand First program the selected output s voltage to its High Range Full Scale value see Table 3 3 by sending the following string VSET lt ch gt lt 20 50 gt d Set the vertical sensitivity switch of Channel A on the oscilloscope to 5 V div 40WLV 80WLV outputs or to 10 V div 40WHV 80WHV outputs With the oscilloscope s input switch in the GND position adjust the trace to the bottom horizontal line Then set the input switch to the dc coupled position Set the vertical sensitivity switch of channel on the oscilloscope to 50 mV div and the input switch to the GND position e Adjust the Channel trace to the top horizontal line of the oscilloscope and move the input switch to the DC position f Adjust the bucking supply until the Channel B trace is as close as possible within 1 division to the top horizontal line and then use the scope vertical adjust to fine adjust the trace to the top horizontal line HP 1981 8719 OR 1981 1287 3 AMP SILICON DIODE Figure 3 6 CV Up Programming Speed Test Setup g Program the output voltage in a loop which alternately programs the output voltage between 0 4 V and the High Range Full Scale Voltage value 20 40WLV 80WLV outputs or 50 V 40WHV 80WHV outputs by running the following program 10 OUTPUT 705 VSET ch gt lt 20 50 gt 20 WAIT 0 05 30 OUTPUT 705 VSET ch 4 40 WAIT 0 05 50GOTO 10 6
121. Chi 2 00 V Div MT Ext Main 2 00 ms Div Analog Multiplexer Output U323 8 Chi 1 00 EN BB Main 2 00 ms Div SB MT Main 2 00 ms Div L Analog Muitiplexer Address Line 0323 16 NOTE The waveforms are ail referenced io Voommon The Readback Signal Comparator output U324 7 was used as the trigger source negative edge Figure 4 11 Sheet 2 High Voltage Output Board Waveforms During Self Exercise Routine 4 40 FEEDBACK RESISTOR NOTE DRASTICALLY INCORRECT FRONT PANEL READINGS E G 50 25A OR DAC OUTPUTS PROGRAMMING IN A SEVERELY NON LINEAR FASHION MAY INDICATE THAT THE OUTPUT S CALIBRATION CONSTANTS ARE GROSSLY INCORRECT THE DEFAULT CALIBRATION CONSTANTS CAN BE RESTORED TO ALL OUTPUTS AT ONCE BY USING THE MODEL COMMAND SEE PARA 4 21 NOTE THAT USING THIS COMMAND CAUSES ALL OUTPUTS TO BE UNCALIBRATED PREVIOUS TROUBLESHOOTING INDICATED A PROBLEM WITH DAC AMPLIFIER OUTPUT PERFORM THIS TEST TWICE ONCE WITH THE DAC SET TO ZERO AND ONCE WITH THE DAC SET TO FULL SCALE S PI H WIT RESPECT TO PIN 7 I BAD OP AMP OR OP AMP 12 TO 15V CRPRCITOR CHECK PIN C VOLTRGE IT SHOULD BE NERR ZERO WITH DRC SET TO ZERO OR 1 V WITH DAC SET TO FULL SCALE REPLRCE DRC INCONCLUSIVE TEST COULD BE LEAKY CAP AROUND OP AMP BAD OP AMP OR BAD DAC Figure 4 12 DAC Amplifier Circuit Troubleshooting 4 41 OVER
122. Contiguous Blocks Common Control Block The Control block is used in conjundion with an array of related symbols in order to group common logic lines Figure A 5 shows how the Control block is usually represented Figure A 6 shows a quad D type flip flop with reset This can be redrawn as shown in Figure A 7 Note that the more complex representation shown in Figure A 6 can be used when the flip flops are functionally scattered around the schematic i e not used as a quad unit CONTROL BLOCK Figure A 5 Common Control Block Figure A 6 Quad D Type Latch Individual Figure 7 Quad D Type Latch Combined Dependency Notation Dependency notation simplifies symbols for complex integrated circuit elements by defining the interdependencies of inputs or outputs without actually showing all the elements and interconnections involved See Figure A 8 and A 9 for examples of AND dependency and enable dependency The input that controls or gates other inputs is labeled with a C or a G followed by an identifying number The controlled or gated input or output is labeled with the same number This example 1 is controlled by C1 When the controlled or gated input or output already has a functional label X is used here that label will be prefixed by the identifying number If the input or output is affected by more than one gate or control input then the identifying numbers of each gate or control input will app
123. E 287K A e e A15 5 a 4 1410215 13 162059447 1820 8482 0699 3958 6 10 55 7AACT32N 6 en gore GND RY 05 1820 5944 2 u 7 222 NS OE 4 10 REF PIN SEQUENSE ESI 96 9 m 5 ao TS0g uu AS 5 7 5 202 210 1 NS 3 WE 0 me 1 RE X pos jt P203 1252 076 5 GND J 53 2PIN 8 POST A 0 15 8 Ter P209 10 PIN Oa Q223 s lt OPTO PON P204 a sv M E og s RB 1252 0761 gt CR205 E b r 8 1 85 POST 2110 0936 g o a amp dh S lt 2 J R230 85 Si 2 8 RZL 2298 28 NN 1901 1375 gt ME 55 8s EF 27 541K C N 28 L201 U220 Ysxe 2 is A HS218 R262 5 U284 wl e 4 B 0220 0699 1385 2 VW SHDN Lal R217 gs 6 8 Q201 og 2 2 C 1K MIC4576 220UH ee LAN B R231 02243 lt aos n 2 al co SZ 5 5 L 1205 0886 0218 0699 1818 1826 6632 91402387 lt 8 e 348 g ES 555 8 4 LM340AK 5 _ 2 e VIN FB SJB ZALE 4 0699 1428 1826 1572 un RE ow 7 8 ZSR 9 IN Our e GND 56 0699 1318 Az 8 QL o gt 580188 gt o jes o 8 R221 NL1826 0536 316 TSR 8 23 Log R232 na ANA OT gt e wo o G 5 log VI 189 a poc 8 c AV 22 Alia V V 25 o5 R So Ou GND1 GND2 o gt 2 RES 0 2598 A OS 5 WV rors 10K C 587 ses 8 5 5
124. F OPERATION 2 1 INTRODUCTION The following paragraphs provide block diagram level descriptions of the power supply Differences between the models are given as required The descriptions provide a basic understanding of circuit operation and are intended as an aid in troubleshooting It is assumed in the following discussions that you are familiar with the operating and programming instructions presented in the Operating Manual Agilent Part No 5957 6377 2 2 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION FIGURE 2 1 Figure 2 1 is a block diagram that illustrates the major assemblies contained within the power supply As shown in the figure each supply includes ac input circuits an GPIB board front panel display and keyboard and two or more output boards 2 3 AC Input Circuit The ac input circuit consists of a line module on the rear panel of the supply front panel ON OFF switch S1 power transformer T1 located in the front of the chassis and a cooling fan located in the rear of the chassis The line module contains a voltage selector card that selects the applicable ac input voltage 100 Vac 120 Vac 220 Vac or 240 Vac The voltage card selection must match the nominal line voltage that is connected to the unit The line module also contains the main fuse F1 An 8 A fuse normal blow must be installed for a 100 120 VAC input a 4 A fuse normal blow must be installed for a 220 240 Vac input The ac input is applied to the power tr
125. FXD FILM 9 09K 1 1 8W 80031 5033 1 8T0 9091F R463 0698 3279 FXD FILM 4 99K 1 1 8W 16299 4 1 8 0 4991 R464 0757 0455 FXD FILM 36 5K 1 1 4W 28480 R465 0757 0464 FXD FILM 90 9K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 10 9092F R466 467 0699 0118 FXD FILM 20K 1 1W 28480 R468 0757 0442 FXD FILM 10K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 10 1002F R469 470 0699 0118 FXD FILM 20K 1 1W 28480 R471 0699 0070 FXD FILM 3 16M 1 1 8W 28480 R472 0699 0388 FXD FILM 500K 1 1 8W 28480 R473 0757 0124 FXD FILM 39 2K 1 1 8W 28480 R474 40WLV 40WHV 0698 7842 FXD FILM 26 1K 1 1 8W 80031 5033R1 89T2612B 80WLV 80WHV 0757 0123 FXD FILM 34 8K 1 28480 R475 0683 8235 FXD FILM 82K 5 1 4W 01121 CB8235 R476 0699 0088 FXD FILM 1 2M 1 1 8W 28480 R477 40WLV 80WLV 0698 5090 FXD FILM 43K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 10 4302F 40WHV 80WHV 0698 3159 FXD FILM 26 1K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 10 2612F R478 40WLV 80WLV 0698 4477 FXD FILM 10 5K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 1052F 40WHV 80WHV 0757 0451 FXD FILM 24 3 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 R479 0699 0118 FXD FILM 20K 1 28480 R480 40WLV 80WLV 0698 8093 FXD FILM 40K 1 1W 01281 MAR5 1 10 T16 40 40WHV 80WHV 0699 1211 FILM 95K 1 28480 R481 40WLV 80WLV 0698 3449 FXD FILM 28 7K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 2872F 40WHV 80WHV 0757 0460 FXD FILM 61 9K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 6192F 5 19 Table 5 7 Output BoardParts List continued Desig Agilent Part Description Mfg Mfg No Code Part No R482 40WLV 8
126. Figure 4 8 d Check that jumper pack W202 is in the proper position specified by the particular SA test Figure 4 8 shows two operating positions normal run position and NOP no operation position W202 is a 16 pin jumper pack To select the normal run position W202 is plugged into 16 pin socket 202 To select the NOP position W202 is connected between 8 pin socket J203 and pins 1 8 of 16 pin socket J 202 see Figure 4 8 Set the signature analyzer START STOP CLOCK GND and edge settings as described in the applicable SA Test table f Turn the power supply on and use the signature analyzer probe to take signatures at the applicable IC test points see Table 4 6 through 4 13 g Upon completion of the S A tests remove short circuit connections from pins 1 and 4 on P205 P208 And return jumpers W201 and W202 to their normal run positions 4 24 FirmwareRevisions The ROM chip U206 on the GPIB board is identified with a label that specifies the revision of your supply s firmware Alternatively if the GPIB board is operating properly the ROM command can be used to query the revision date As stated in paragraph 4 22 the revision date for firmware revision 02 is 2629 where 26 specifies 1986 and 29 is the week number The previous firmware revision was 1 01 2605 To query the revision date of the firmware ROM in your supply run the short program listed below 10 OUTPUT 705 ROM 20 ENTER 705 30 DISP
127. HREADED INSERT REF CHAS TOP 6621 06621 80003 LABEL REAR PANEL 6622 06621 80003 LABEL REAR PANEL 6623 06623 80003 LABEL REAR PANEL 6624 06624 80009 LABEL REAR PANEL 6627 06624 80009 LABEL REAR PANEL 06624 80010 LABEL COMP PRINTABLE 06624 00013 COVER OUTER 6621 06621 60006 CHASSIS ASSEMBLY 6622 06622 60006 CHASSIS ASSEMBLY 6623 06623 60006 CHASSIS ASSEMBLY 6624 06624 60008 CHASSIS ASSEMBLY 6627 06627 60008 CHASSIS ASSEMBLY 06624 00009 CHASSIS MAIN 06624 00010 CHASSIS TOP ASSEMBLY 1510 0044 BINDING POST REF REAR PANEL GND 2190 0034 WASHER LK HCCL REF GPIB STDF 2190 0584 WASHER LK HLCL REF FRONT FRAME 2190 0586 WASHER LK HLCL REF HS TO PCB REF OUTPUT BD 2190 0587 WASHER LK REF XFMR 2190 0646 WASHER LK REF GND STUD XFMR GND 3050 0891 WASHER FL MILC REF FT FR 3050 0893 WASHER FL MTLC REF XFMR 3050 0894 WASHER FLT REF FLT XFMR 3110 0177 HINGE ASSEMBLY 5001 0539 SIDE TRIM 5 1 4 5040 5448 WINDOW LCD REF FRONT PANEL 5040 1653 WASHER SHLD REF CHASS MAIN ASSY 5041 8801 FEET REF CHASS ASSY 5041 8819 CAP STRAP REF HANDLE 5041 8820 CAP STRAP REF HANDLE 5062 3704 STRAP HANDLE 5080 2117 INSULATOR NOMEX REF XFMR 1400 0611 CABLE CLAMP REF FRONT PANEL 06624 20007 BARRIER BLOCK COVER 28480 0360 2310 BARRIER BLOCK JUMPER 28480 Chassis Miscellaneous 5080 2120 FOAM PACKING 5957 6377 MANUAL OPERATION 9211 5869 CTN CORR PACKING CARTON 9222 0456 BAG CUSHD PACKING BAG Table 5 6 GPIB Through hole Board Parts Lis
128. ING FRONT PANEL OUTPUT INDICATION LOW LOW OR LOW MED LOW HIGH UNREG LOW UNR MODE UNR ANNUNCIATOR LOW LOW HIGH UNREG LOW UNR MODE UNR ANNUNCIATOR LOW x x OV HIGH OVERVOLTAGE OVERVOLTAGE MESSAGE OT HIGH MESSAGE OVERTEMPERATURE ALL 6 OUTPUTS NO CHANGE OPEN CIRCUIT Figure 4 19 Signal Processor U327 Status Monitor Circuit Simplified Schematic Diagram LOW X X DON T CARE HIGH LOW MEDIUM LEVELS ARE GIVEN IN TABLE 4 16 4 57 ICHECK OPERATING MANUAL PARA 4 5 FOR A DISCUSSION OF OPERATING STATUS PCE UNR STATUS NI STRTUS OBSERVED 0 OBSERVED CC STATUS OBSERVED SET SCOPE TO TROUBLESHOOT STATUS PROBLEMS AS DESCRIBED IN PARA 4 32 DURING THE INTERVAL WHEN STATUS SELECT FRONT PANEL DISPLAY ANNUNCIATORS SEE FIGURE 4 19 CHECK U312 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY OR CABLE DURING THE INTERVAL WHEN STATUS SELECT IS LOW CHECK THE FIVE 0327 STATUS INPUT LINES AGAINST THE SIX STATUS OUTPUT LINES SEE FIG 4 19 CHECK U326 U327 OR SHORT ON U327 OUTPUT LINES CHECK CONTROL LOOPS SITUS BE DUE TO SUPPLY NOT BEING CALIBRATED IMPROPER LINE VOLTRGE SELECTOR CARD POSITION OR OPERATION BELOW LOW LINE VOLTAGE STATUS MAY BE DUE TO SHORT ON RESISTOR GO OUTPUT WITH SUPPLY OFF CHECK THAT OUTPUT LOOKS LIKE DIODE CATHODE ON V IN PARALLEL WITH THE RESISTOR SHOWN HERE Figure 4 20 Status Problems Troubleshooting
129. K 5 HU0180 3803 HU0160 6565 PURCH 01527 C420 6 8 759 1 0 1000 125 2 R393 Q320 20 39 2 022 109 Hy 3 ADP 250VAC 5 BLEED SINK 5 75U 3 C369 3 gt 1036 1 2 co POV DISABLE 003308550 p E 100U DU SENSE R300 DRIUE 3 gt 2023 C415 Rago 2 gt PY GATE 10M 5x FUSE STICK R400 2026 1 asovac 1 24 10K THERM SHUNT 3 10M JTN 2 DRIVE SINK BED gt 2 3 gt z gt Ev FEEDBACK 1800 HU0160 4801 NZCR345 3 ro SENSE 5 R425 6399 100PF 1000 ANY DUT TERM 392 2 3 gt 509 CU CL CONTROL R433 GUT TERM 5 AAA gt M 6 19K 3 o SENSE ALTERNATE PART CL CONTROL 499 R HV0698 3444 R449 2 mv FOR R408 316 221 HU0698 3447 ou 442 2 gt Figure 6 4 Output 3 amp 4 Board Schematic Diagram sheet 4 of 4 6 19 0000000 _ GSM S229 9149499019 omo 20009 1000000 ms ooo Sino ipn S te oj 1 a Feste 153 6666665666 8 o Ber8 5 Lee 299999919 b MEANE ES o 6666666066
130. K THAT U324 IS PULSING SEE FIG 4 187 OR 4 11 CHECK U324 AND SA LINE TO 12312 Figure 4 9 Sheet 5 Output Board Troubleshooting 4 35 CHECK THAT THE OUTPUT OF THE FRILED DAC CV DAC U31S 1 CL DAC 0315 2 OR OV DAC 0315 8 IS AS SHOWN IN FIG 4 10A 4 11A OR 4 18 4 11 IF INDIVIDUAL BITS ARE MISSING TURN SUPPLY OFF REMOVE JUMPER FROM U312 27 INSTALL JUMPER W201 ON THE GPIB BOARD IN THE SKIP SELF TEST POSITION ON P28 TURN ON SUPPLY GO TO F1G 4 12 TO CHECK THE DAC AND THE AMPLIFIER CHECK THAT THE SIGNAL AT v TERMINAL IS RS SHOWN IN FIG 4 10C74 11C CHECK U323 SEE PARA 4 23 CHECK THAT THE SIGNAL RT U352 7 IS RS SHOWN IN FIG 4 1 B 4 11B THAT THE E SIGNAL AT U31S 1 SHOWN INF IG 4 1 R 4 11A DAC DEFECTIVE U313 CL U314 1314 OR RERDBRCK 1321 Figure 4 9 Sheet 6 Output Board Troubleshooting 4 36 CHECK U319C AND 4323 SEE PARA 4 29 PROBLEM EXISTS WITH THE ANALOG CIRCUITRY WHICH CAN BE LOOKED AT WITH THE UNIT IN THE SKIP SELF TEST MODE HOWEVER THIS IS NOT CAUSING DAC ERROR CHECK U3S2B CIRCUIT Chi 2 00 V Div B CV DAC Buffer U352 7 2 00 V Div MT Ext Main 2 00 ms Div D Differential Amplifier U352 1 i CL Toggle Signal on C408 FET Downprogrammer 0342 Gate 1 NOTE The waveforms are all referenced to Woaminon The Readback Signal Comparator output U324 7 was used as the trigge
131. L LOCK Error codes that can be sent back over the HP IB in response to TEST TEST initiates a self test of the supply There are no messages on the front panel in response to the TEST query Only the applicable error code is sent back 4 18 GPIB BOARD AND FRONT PANEL TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES NOTE The GPIB troubleshooting procedures in this section apply only to earlier through hole board assemblies Surface mount GPIB assemblies are not repairable to the component level If defective the entire GPIB assembly must be replaced Troubleshooting procedures for the GPIB board and Front Panel are given in the flow chart of Figure 4 7 The procedures first ensure that the bias voltages for the GPIB board circuits and the Front Panel display are correct The microprocessor clock the RAM and ROM circuits are then checked After these preliminary checks are made signature analysis tests are performed as described in paragraph 4 22 to determine which component is defective 4 19 Test Setup The following test setup allows access to the components on the GPIB board a Disconnect the line cord b Remove the GPIB board as described in paragraphs 4 3 through 4 6 c Place an insulating material on the chassis and lay the GPIB board on top of the material d Reconnect all cables in their proper locations e Connect the line cord The GPIB board is connected to the chassis ground with one PC boar
132. LV 0698 3638 FXD FILM 1 1K 5 2W 01121 EB2225 80WHV 0764 0019 FXD FILM 3 9K 5 1 2W 01121 EB8225 R377 40WLV 40WHV 0698 4446 FXD FILM 267 1 1 8W 28480 80WLV 80WHV 0758 0404 FXD FILM 130 1 1 8W 28480 R378 0757 0438 FXD FILM 5 11K 1 1 8W 24546 CT4 1 8 T0 5111F R379 0698 5347 FXD FILM 495 5 1 28480 R380 40WLV 0698 4416 FXD FILM 169 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 169RF 40WHV 0698 3510 FXD FILM 453 1 1 8w 28480 80WLV 0698 4397 FXD FILM 84 5 28480 80WHV 0757 0282 FXD FILM 221 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 221RF R381 40WLV 0698 3486 FXD FILM 232 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 232RF 40WHV 0698 3510 FXD FILM 453 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 453RF 80WLV 0698 4406 FXD FILM 115 28480 80WHV 0757 0282 FXD FILM 221 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 211RF R382 0757 0465 FXD FILM 100K 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 1003F R383 40WLV 40WHV 0757 0280 FXD FILM 1K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 1001F 80WLV 80WHV 0757 0419 FXD FILM 681 1 1 8W 28480 R384 40WLV 40WHV 0757 0280 FXD FILM 1K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 1001F 80WLV 80WHV NOT USED 5 16 Table 5 7 Output BoardParts List continued Desig Agilent Part Description Mfg Mfg No Code Part No R385 40WLV 0811 0098 FXD FILM 135 5 5W PW 28480 40WHV 0811 1217 FILM 150 5 5W PW 28480 80WLV 0811 0941 FXD FILM 75 5 5W PW 28480 80WHV NOT USED R386 40WLV 0686 2225 FXD FILM 2 2K 5 1 2W 01121 EB2225 40WHV 0686 8225 FXD FILM 8 2K 5 1 2W 01121 EB8225 80WLV 0698 3638 FXD FILM 1 1K 5 2W 01121 EB2225 80WHV 0764 00
133. Manual If certain components in the output circuits DAC S voltage control circuit or current control circuit or the readback circuits e g readback buffers DAC amplifiers signal comparator on the output board are replaced the associated output channd must be recalibrated as described in Appendix A of the Operating M anual 4 28 Self Exercise Routine on an Output Board The output board can be put into a mode that exercises the microcomputer U312 and all of the DAC s for ease of troubleshooting In order to enter this mode U312 pin 27 must be tied to common before the supply is turned on 4 30 Immediately following turn on the RAM and ROM self tests on U312 are performed provided that the PCLR signal from the signal processor U327 goes High Then the self exercise routine begins This routine runs independently of the GPIB board which is ignored by an output board operating in this mode During the routine the display indicates HDW ERR CH ch gt as if that output board were defective The self exercise routine is used in the troubleshooting procedures provided on sheets 5 and 6 of Figure 4 9 The output voltage and current limit are repetitively programmed to full scale values during the self exercise routine Be sure that no load of any kind is connected to the output terminals when operating in this mode Also note that the POV DISABLE line U312 pin 23 is High which disables the programmable OV the fixed ove
134. Mfg Mfg No Code Part No Electrical Parts 5063 4837 GPIB Board tested assembly 5063 3471 untested 1853 0567 Transistor PNP Note All other electrical parts are surface mounted and are not field repairable Mechanical Parts 1205 0886 Heatsink U218 0340 0884 Insulator U218 0515 1105 Screw M3x0 5 U218 2 2190 0584 Lockwasher U218 2 0380 1679 Standoff HEX U218 2 0535 0031 Nut hex w lockwasher J101 2 5 8 Table 5 7 Output BoardParts List Desig Agilent Part Description Mfg Mfg No Code Part No C300 0160 4833 FXD CER 0 022uF 10 100V 28480 C301 0180 4141 C302 0180 4141 C303 304 0160 4835 FXD CER 0 1uF 10 50V 28480 C305 0180 0291 FXD ELECT 1uF 10 35VDC TAN 56289 150D105X9035A2 C306 0180 0100 FXD ELECT 4 7uF 10 TAN 35V 56289 150D475X9035B2 C307 308 0160 4835 FXD CER 0 1uF 10 50V 28480 C309 0180 0291 ELECT 1uF 10 35VDC TAN 56289 150D105X9035A2 C310 0180 0100 FXD ELECT 4 7uF 10 TAN 35V 56289 150D475X9035B2 C311 313 0180 0291 FXD ELECT 1uF 10 35VDC TAN 56289 150D105X9035A2 C314 0180 0291 FXD ELECT 1uF 10 35VDC TAN 56289 150D105X9035A2 C315 0160 4281 FXD METPA 2200pF 2076 250VDC 28480 C316 319 NOT USED C320 0160 4800 FXD CER 120PF 576 100VDC 28480 C321 322 0160 4835 FXD CER 0 1uF 10 50v 28480 C323 0160 4800 FXD CER 120pF 576 100VDC 28480 C324 0160 4787 FXD CER 22pF 576 100V 28480 C325 0160 4835 FXD CER 0 1uF 10 50V 28480 C326 0160 4812 FXD CER 220pF 5 100VDC 28480 C327
135. NOTES HIGH VOLTAGE 014 CS 1250 Ty C341 2200PF 100U i 0323 06508 6540 54 51 AA D 52 4 99 53 54 A0 s5 eet 1 at 56 57 58 150 U Vv CR310 15 500 K v 15U OU DAC 0 TO 10U CC DAC 0 TO 10U CU DRC 0 TO 10U AAA 20K 1 SHUNT AMP Figure 6 4 Output 3 amp 4 Board Schematic Diagram sheet 1 of 4 6 16 F308 P301 1 lt BIAS CKT 501 26 F309 P301 3 lt UNREG BIAS 9500 LM317T R308 gt 5U 0502 LM317T C315 HP34 82ooPF 2500 777 A A 9501 0303 o 5 75V LM337T LM337T 15U OU DAC 0 TO 40U 0000000000000 0 15 SHUNT AMP 1 3 gt DC0 2 1 R345 OUT ENABLE 0 1 HU0699 0070 REF 1 1 4 gt DISABLE 16M MED RAIL R365 R366 R358 R357 R356 4 1 21M KP 1 5 10K 5x HU0698 4529 e HU0699 1212 2055 16 19K 1x R359 R361 TERM 1 3 U REF 1 19K 1 VR305 UNREG BIAS C352 R360 1 24 3K 0699 lt 1211 01 HU0257 0446 R346 6 150 500 2008311 tsk ZCR312 5K 4 TURN ON CKT 2 R347 CuO OV_COMP URZ06 10K CLO OV_OR 4 REMOTE DU TRIP 2 20 50 Sx P
136. NPSI 28480 Q329 40WLV 40WHV_ NOT USED 80WLV SOWHV 1853 0423 XSTR PNP SI 28480 Q330 334 NOT USED Q335 40WLV 1854 0404 XSTR NPN SI 28480 40WHV 80WLV 1854 0585 XSTR NPNSI 04713 MJE182 80WHV Q336 340 NOT USED 0341 40WHV 80WHV 5060 3211 XSTR FET ASSEMBLY 28480 IRF512 80WLV 40WLV 1855 0665 XSTR FET 28480 EB4725 Q342 1855 0549 XSTR FET BEAD 9170 0894 81483 Q343 1854 0477 R300 301 0686 4725 FXD FILM 4 7K 5 1 2W 01121 R302 0811 0610 FXD FILM 56 5 5W 28480 R303 0698 8911 FXD FILM 1 3K 1 28480 R304 0757 0403 FXD FILM 121 1 1 8W 28480 R305 0698 8672 FXD FILM 243 4K 1 28480 R306 0698 3700 FXD FILM 715 1 1 8W 24546 CT4 1 8 T0 715RF R307 308 8159 0005 FXD FILM ZERO OHMS 28480 R309 0698 8672 FXD FILM 243 4 1 28480 R310 0698 0085 FXD FILM 2 61K 1 1 8w 28480 R311 0698 4123 FXD FILM 499 1 1 8w 28480 R312 0757 0402 FXD FILM 110 1 1 8W 28480 R313 314 8159 0005 FXD FILM ZERO OHMS 28480 R315 NOT USED R316 317 0699 0208 FILM 1 5 1 4W 28480 R318 0757 0284 FXD FILM 150 1 1 8W 28480 R319 323 NOT USED 5 14 Table 5 7 Output BoardParts List continued Desig Agilent Part Description Mfg Mfg No Code Part No R324 325 0757 0452 FXD FILM 27 4K 1 1 8W 24546 CT4 1 8 T0 2742F R326 327 0757 0424 FXD FILM 1 1K 1 1 8W 28480 R328 NOT USED R329 8159 0005 FXD FILM ZERO OHMS 28480 R330 332 NOT USED R333 0757 0410 F XD FILM 301 1 1 8W 24546 CT4 1 8 T0 301RF R334 NOT USED R335 0698 3215 FXD FILM 499K 1 1
137. NTUR Md e eut ne TER 6 8 6 3 Output 1 amp 2 Board Component 1 ea aaa aaa aaa nenne nene he hene nnn nen 6 9 6 3 Output 1 amp 2 Board Schematic Diagram 6 10 6 4 Output 3 amp 4 Board Component nennen hen nennen nenne ne nnne 6 15 6 4 Output 3 amp 4 Board Schematic Diagram 6 16 6 5 Output 1 amp 280W Board Component 0 aaa aaa aaa akara nennen nnn 6 25 6 5 Output 16 2 80W Board Schematic eee aaa aaa aa aaa aaa aaa eee nnne nenne nnns 6 26 iii LIST OF TABLES Table Page 3 1 Test Equipment Required for Verification 1 ee eene enne hen ren rhe aaa aaa 3 2 3 2 Low Range Voltage and Current Values 3 aaa 3 5 3 3 High Range Voltage and Current Values 44002 2 0 0000 0 en nenne nenne nene nnn nnn 3 6 3 4 Performance Test Record for 40WLV 80WLV 44 1 1 11 nnne nnn nnns 3 16 3 5 Performance Test Record for 40WH V 80WHV Outputs meme hne nennen rene nn rne nnn nens 3 17 4 1 Test Equipment Required for Troubleshooting ook
138. ORIGINALLY CAUSED PROBLEM CHECK THAT CVDAC OUTPUT 0315 1 15 APPROXIMATELY SCALED TO THE PROGRAMMED VALUE WHERE TO 108 ON THE DAC ROUGHLY CORRESPONDS TO TO FULL SCALE PROGRAMMED VALLE CHECK CVDAC AMPLIFIER 0313 4315 SEE FIG 4 12 CHECK THAT THE VOLTAGE ACROSS ERCH RESISTOR R379 R382 AND R361 IS 1 2v REFER TO THE TOP OF FIG 4 14 SHEET 2 MEASURE VOLTAGE ACROSS R428 AND COMPARE TO VALUES BELOW RSSUMING NO LOAD ON OUTPUT MIN R428 MAX R428 OUTPUT VOLTAGE VOLTAGE 56v 8 31v 32v S V 1 1V 1 8V 62v 1 0 CHECK 032 AND L338 ON 484 0321 2325 AND 43384339 ON S K TAG ON R426 lt MIN VALLE No CHECK 0335 U3488 B D CHECK 5 Figure 4 15 Output Held High Troubleshooting 4 47 AN OUTPUT S OVERVOLTRGE CIRCUIT WILL NOT TRIP OUTPUT VOLTAGE CAN BE PROGRAMMED TURN ON SUPPLY IF THE BIAS REFERENCE AND RAIL VOLTAGES HAVE NOT BEEN CHECKED DO SO NOW RS DESCRIBED IN FIG 4 3 SHEET 1 PROGRAM THE VOLTAGE TO FULL SCALE AND THE OVERVOLTRGE TO 175 FULL SCRLE CHECK OVDRC RMPLIFIER U314 U31SC SEE 4 12 RRIL VOLTRGE CHECK CR33 CHECK R3S6 R361 C352 CR311 AND CR312 CHECK 4312 U326 U338 11 gt 6 5V CHECK U338 NO CHECK RS 1 CR357 CHECK FOR U338 11 SHORTED TO COMMON U338 SCR BE FIRED BUT STATUS PROBLEM WITH U327 MAY EXIST SEE FIG 4 18 CHECK U327 SEE FIG 4 17 Figure 4 16 OV Will Not Trip Troub
139. R340 40WLV 40WHV 1901 0731 DIO PWR RECT 400V 1A 80795 1N4004G 80WLV SOWHV 1901 0033 DIO SW 13141 1N645 CR341 NOT USED 5 12 Table 5 7 Output BoardParts List continued Desig Agilent Part Description Mfg Mfg No Code Part No CR342 1901 0033 DIO SW 13141 1N645 CR343 344 NOT USED CR345 349 1901 0050 DIO SW 13141 1N4150 CR350 1901 0033 DIO SW 13141 1N645 CR351 1901 0050 DIO SW 13141 1N4150 CR352 353 1901 0033 DIO 5W 13141 1N645 CR354 359 1901 0050 DIO SW 13141 1N4150 CR360 1901 1080 DIO SCHOTTKY 04713 1N5817 CR361 362 1901 0731 DIO PWR RECT 400v 1A 80795 1N4004G CR363 364 40WLV 40WHV NOT USED 80WLV 80WHV 1901 0731 DIO PWR RECT 400v 1A 80795 1N4004G CR365 40WLV 40WHV NOT USED 80WLV 80WHV 1901 1065 DIO PWR RECT 28480 CR366 40WLV 40WHV NOT USED 80WLV 80WHV 1901 0050 DIO SW 13141 1N4150 F300 40WLV 2110 0713 FUSE 10A 125V 28480 40WHV 2110 0916 FUSE 7A 125V 28480 80WLV 80WHV NOT USED F301 40WLV 2110 0713 FUSE 10A 125V 28480 40WHV 2110 0685 FUSE 7A 125V 28480 80WLV 80WHV NOT USED F302 40WLV 80WLV 2110 0716 FUSE 0 5A 28480 40WHV 80WHV 2110 0763 FUSE 0 25A 28480 F303 40WLV 40WHV 2110 0685 FUSE 7A 125V 28480 80WLV 2110 0767 FUSE 20A 250V 28480 80WHV 2110 0383 FUSE 8A 250V 28480 F304 40WLV 2110 0916 FUSE 7A 125V 28480 40WHV 2110 0916 FUSE 7A 125V 28480 80WLV 80WHV 2110 0383 FUSE 8A SLO BLO 28480 F305 306 40WLV 2110 0713 FUSE 10A 125V 28480 40WHV 2110 0916 FU
140. R361 8159 0005 FXD FILM ZERO OHMS 28480 R362 0757 0283 FXD FILM 2K 1 1 8W 28480 R363 364 0757 0416 FXD FILM 511 1 1 8W 28480 R365 40WLV 80WLV 0698 3329 FXD FILM 10K 5 28480 40WHV 80WHV 0699 1212 FXD FILM 19K 1 28480 R366 40WLV 80WLV 0757 0458 FXD FILM 51 1K 1 1 8W 28480 40WHV 80WHV 0699 1722 FXD FILM 9 75K 1 1 8W 28480 5 15 Table 5 7 Output BoardParts List continued Desig Agilent Part Description Mfg Mfg No Code Part No R367 40WLV 8159 0005 FXD FILM ZERO OHMS 28480 40WHV 80WLV 80WHV NOT USED R368 40WLV 80WLV NOT USED 80WHV 8159 0005 FXD FILM ZERO OHMS 28480 40WHV NOT USED R369 R370 40WLV 40WHV USED 80WHV 0683 6805 FXD FILM 68 5 1 4W 28480 80WLV 8159 0005 FXD FILM ZERO OHMS 28480 R371 40WLV 40WHV NOT USED 80WHV 0683 6805 FXD FILM 68 5 1 4w 28480 80WLV 8159 0005 FXD FILM ZERO OHMS 28480 R372 0683 0335 FXD FILM 3 3 5 1 4w 01121 CB33G5 R373 40WLV 40WHV 0698 4470 FXD FILM 6 98K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 6981F 80WLV 0698 3359 FXD FILM 12 7K 1 1 8W 28480 80WHV 0698 3156 FXD FILM 14 7K 1 1 8W 28480 R374 0757 0452 FXD FILM 27 4K 1 1 8W 28480 R375 40WLV 0686 5615 FXD FILM 560 5 1 2W 01121 EB5615 80WLV 0698 3629 FXD FILM 270 5 2W 01121 EB2715 40WHV 0686 2225 FXD FILM 2 2K 5 1 2W 01121 EB2225 80WHV 0764 0016 FILM 1K 5 2W 01121 EB1025 R376 40WLV 0686 2225 FXD FILM 2 2K 5 1 2W 01121 EB2225 40WHV 0686 4725 FXD FILM 4 7 5 1 2W 01121 EB4725 80W
141. SE 7A 125V 28480 80WLV 2110 0767 FUSE 20A 250V 28480 80WHV 2110 0383 FUSE 8A 250V 28480 F307 40WLV 40WHV NOT USED 80WLV 80WHV NOT USED F308 309 2110 0303 FUSE 2A 250V 28480 L300 9140 0129 INDTR FXD 220uH 5 28480 L301 NOT USED L302 40WLV 80WLV 9140 0238 INDTR FXD 82uH 5 28480 40WHV 80WHV 9100 1640 INDTR FXD 160uH 5 28480 L303 40WLV 40WHV NOT USED 80WLV 80WHV 9140 0129 INDTR FXD 220uH 5 28480 L304 NOT USED L305 40WLV 40WHV NOT USED 80WLV 9100 0238 INDTR FXD 82uH 5 28480 80WHV 9100 1640 INDTR FXD 160uH 5 28480 5 13 Table 5 7 Output BoardParts List continued Desig Agilent Part Description Mfg Mfg No Code Part No L306 307 40WLV 40WHV_ NOT USED 80WLV SOWHV 9170 0894 FERRITE BEAD 28480 P301 1251 4246 CONN POST TP HDR 28480 P302 1252 2493 CONN POST TYPE HDR 4 CONT 28480 P303 40WLV 80WLV 1251 6832 CONN POST TP 28480 40WHV 80WHV 1252 1670 CONN POST TP 28480 P304 40WLV 40WHV_ NOT USED 80WLV 1251 6832 CONN POST TP 28480 80WHV 1252 1670 CONN POST TP 28480 Q300 318 NOT USED Q319 1854 0477 XSTR NPN 2N2222A 80795 2N2222A Q320 1855 0665 XSTR FET N CHAN LOG LEV 28480 Q321 1853 0320 XSTR PNP 2N4032 07263 2N4032 Q322 24 NOT USED Q325 40WLV 40WHV_ NOT USED 80WLV 80WHV 1853 0320 XSTR PNP 2N4032 28480 Q326 327 40WLV 40WHV_ NOT USED 80WLV 80WHV 1853 0423 XSTR PNPSI 28480 Q328 40WLV 40WHV_ NOT USED 80WLV 80WHV 1853 0036 XSTR P
142. SET lt ch gt lt 20 2 or 50 5 gt Adjust the load for High Range Full Scale Voltage as indicated on the front panel display Check that the CC annunciator is on If it is not adjust the load so that the output voltage drops slightly g Record the output current reading DVM reading X 10 h Adjust the transformer to 6 above the nominal line voltage i Record the output current reading again The difference in the current readings in steps g and i is the CC source effect and should not exceed the values listed below for the particular output being tested Output CC Source Effect 40WLV 2 2 mA 80WLV 4 4 mA 40WH V 14 mA 80WHV 3 2 mA j Repeat this test steps a through i for each output in your supply 3 27 CC RMS Noise This test measures the rms noise in the output when operating in the constant current mode a Turn off the supply and connect the output to be tested as shown in Figure 3 3 with an rms voltmeter connected across the output the load switch closed and the short switch opened b Turn on the supply and select the output to be tested OUTPUT SELECT switch on front pand Program the current of the selected output to 1 9 amps and the output voltage to 20 2 volts by sending the following strings ISET lt ch gt 1 9 VSET lt ch gt 20 2 NOTE This test must be performed with a resistive load only The use of an electronic load will invariably inject extra ripple and may cause the CC
143. Se 2 5 568 553 2 gt Nre 8 ANTXO a gt 8 2 8 B ay Frog 8 3 4 s r QL BLING L 92 2 OTZ4 9 C SZETT NSLT 1K C Po ig ee 0699 1391 ave ZA 3 REG Ry wa m2 Ame 22589 RFS as 58 45590 0699 1318 EX SOT Sg 8 g 817Xxg8 515 92 8 OT 2480 8 Q225 s pe 7 5 85 158 8 NTa g 2 845 lt 45 R204 88 R28 ool o C223 FINE T AA e eww N 85 e 2 e 196K C 511K C JEZ 0 1 10 0699 1375 3 0699 1385 M S fe 50V FIX NL0160 6222 R211 R229 UNREG d e ANN e 0 VVv 10K C 511K C SCREW M3 P BIAS COM 0699 1391 0699 1385 Figure 6 2 GPIB Board Schematic Diagram 6 8
144. TRE NI 03129402 SI CNY 505508 MAB NO ANO 0357 SI SEEN I 51115312 108102 Figure 2 5 Output Board Power Mesh and Control Circuits Block Diagram 2 12 GAIN 1 2 FOR 4QMLV SOWLV OUTPUTS C402 GAIN 1 5 FOR 4 MHV B NHV OUTPUTS DRIVE IcrRCUIT RERDBRCK VOLTAGE CONTROL R466 CIRCUIT R470 9352 GE 229 i CV za INV TT 4 ee 7 i Raga A R485 Rags rt 8488 me im 1 1 NEGRTIVE CURRENT LIMIT CIRCUIT Figure 2 6 Voltage and Current Control Circuits Simplified Schematic Diagram interface circuit must be on approximately 2 V in order to activate the voltage control circuit The voltage control circuit compares the output voltage to the programmable reference voltage CV REF to produce the CV signal As shown in the simplified schematic of Figure 2 6 the major components in the voltage control circuit are unity gain inverter buffer U352B output sense inverting differential amplifier U352A and CV error amplifier U347 The reference voltage CV REF 0 to 10 V is applied to U353 which produces a 0 to 10 V signal feeding into the summing junction S1 The output voltage is monitored by U352A which produces a 0 to 10
145. V 80WHV and resetting the OV circuit as shown below OVSET lt ch gt lt 23 55 gt OVRST lt ch gt i Check that the front panel again displays the programmed output voltage and no current j Repeat steps b through i for each output in your supply External OV Test This test checks the operation of the external OV circuit a Turn off the supply and connect the OV terminals of all outputs in parallel noting proper polarity Figure 3 11 shows two outputs connected in paralld b Turn on the supply and select the desired OUTPUT SELECT key on the front panel c Program the output voltage to 5 V and the OV to 4V VSET lt ch gt 5 OVSET ch gt 4 3 10 d Note the display should indicate OVERVOLTAGE for all outputs e Reset all outputs by turning the supply off and on again f Repeat the above tests until all supply outputs have been checked Figure 3 11 OV External Trip Test Connections 3 21 Constant Current CC Tests 3 22 CC Setup Follow the general setup instructions of paragraphs 3 5 through 3 9 and the specific instructions given in the following paragraphs 3 23 Current Programming and Readback Accuracy This test verifies that the current programming GPIB readback and front panel display functions are within specifications An GPIB controller must be used for this test The accuracy of the current monitoring resistor must be 0 05 or better a Turn off the supply and connect a 0 1 o
146. VDC TAN 56289 150D105X9035A2 C407 0160 4801 FXD CER 100pF 5 100VDC 28480 C408 0160 5422 FXD CER 0 047 uF 20 50VDC 28480 C409 410 40WLV 80WLV 0160 4904 FXD CER 6800pF 5 50VDC 28480 40WHV 80WHV 0160 5410 FXD CER 3300pF 5 50VDC 28480 C411 412 0160 5098 FXD 0 22uF 100 50VDC 24546 CAC05X7R22 C413 40WLV 80WLV 0160 6827 40WHV 80WHV 0160 7320 FXD CER 0 01uF 2 5 28480 C414 40WLV 80WLV 0160 4904 FXD CER 6800pF 5 50VDC 28480 40WHV 80WHV 0160 5410 FXD CER 3300pF 5 50VDC 28480 C415 0160 4048 FXD METPA 0 022uF 20 250VDC 28480 C416 40WLV 80WLV 0180 3805 FXD ELECT 10uF 50V 28480 40WHV 80WHV 0180 3803 FXD ELECT 6 8uF 75V 28480 C417 40WLV 80WLV 0160 6564 FXD ELECT 1 8uF 50V 28480 40WHV 80WHV 0160 6565 FXD ELECT 1uF 100V 28480 C418 0160 4832 FXD CER 0 01uF 10 100VDC 28480 Table 5 7 Output BoardParts List continued Desig Agilent Part Description Mfg Mfg No Code Part No C419 0180 0291 FXD ELECT 1uF 10 35VDC TAN 56289 150D105X9035A2 C420 0160 4048 FXD METPA 0 022uF 20 250VDC 28480 C421 0160 4832 FXD CER 0 01uF 10 100VDC 28480 C422 0160 3969 FXD 0 015uF 20 250VDC 28480 C423 0180 0291 FXD ELECT 1uF 10 35VDC TAN 56289 150D105X9035A2 C424 40WLV 80WLV 0160 4833 FXD CER 0 022uF 10 100V 28480 40WHV 80WHV 0160 4834 FXD CER 0 047uF 10 100VDC 28480 C426 0160 4832 FXD CER 0 01uF 10 100VDC 28480 C427 0160 4966 METPLSTC CER 1uF 10 100VDC 28480 C428 NOT USED C429 0160
147. VOLTAGE IS DISPLAYED AT POWER ON OR WHEN OUTPUT VOLTAGE IS PROGRAMMED BELOW OVERVOLTAGE TRIP POINT THROUGHOUT THIS TROUBLESHOOTING CHART BE SURE THE OUTPUT VOLTAGE AND OVER VOLTAGE ARE SET TO THE VALUES THAT CAUSED OVERVOLTAGE TO BE DISPLAYED THE OVDAC VOLTAGE SHOULD BE APPROXIMATELY SCALED TO THE PROGRAMMED OVERVOLTAGE VALUE WHERE 0 TO 10 ON THE DAC ROUGHLY CORRESPONDS TO TO FULL SCALE PROGRAMMED VALUE OVDAC U315 8 OK YES TURN OFF SUPPLY WITH 0328 DRAIN CASE SHORTED TO COMMON USE AN OHMMETER WITH POSITIVE LEAD ON U338 S SCR ANODE AND NEGATIVE LEAD ON COMMON TO CHECK SCR LEAKAGE USE SIMPSON OHMMETER ON RX1 RANGE OR 1mA DIODE TEST SCALE DVM AT 25 5 SCR LERKAGE SHOULD lt 8 REMOVE SHORT FROM 20 LIFT R438 TURN ON SUPPLY AND SET OUTPUT VOLTAGE AND OVERVOLTRGE TO THE VALUES THAT ORIGINALLY TURN OFF SUPPLY LIFT RS 1 TURN ON SUPPLY AND SET OUTPUT VOLTAGE AND OVERVOLTRGE TO THE VALUES THAT ORIGINALLY CAUSED THE PROBLEM SEE WARNING CHECK U327 REFER TO STATUS INFORMATION IN PARA 4 38 CHECK OVDAC AMPLIFIER U314 U315 8 SEE FIG 4 12 CHECK POWER MODULE 4338 ON 40 0338 AND U333 B K WITH R498 OR LIFTED AND THE SUPPLY TURNED ON HIGH OUTPUT VOLTAGE MAY BE PRESENT EVEN IF THE OUTPUT IS NOT PROGRAMMED UP CHECK 354 Figure 4 13 Sheet 1 Overvoltage Troubleshooting Flow Chart FROM SHEET 1 CHECK POWER MODULE 0338 ON 404 U338 AND 43
148. WHV 80WHV 0811 3752 FXD RES 18 5 2W 28480 R408 40WLV 0811 3796 FXD RES 050 7W 2 28480 40WHV 0811 3795 FXD RES 125 7W 2 28480 80WLV 0811 3764 FXD RES 025 7W 2 28480 80WHV 0811 3765 FXD RES 062 7W 2 28480 R409 40WLV 2110 0712 FUSE SUBMIN 4A 28480 80WLV 8159 0005 FXD FILM ZERO OHMS 28480 40WHV 0757 0442 FXD FILM 10K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 1002F 80WHV 0683 1035 FXD FILM 10K 5 1 4W 01121 CB1035 5 17 Table 5 7 Output BoardParts List continued Desig Agilent Part Description Mfg Mfg No Code Part No R410 40WLV NOT USED 40WHV 0757 0442 FXD FILM 10K 1 1 8W 28480 80WLV 2110 0712 FUSE SUBMIN 4A 28480 80WHV 0683 1035 FXD FILM 10K 1 1 8W 28480 R411 40WLV 0811 1801 FXD FILM 490 5 3W 28480 40WHV 0812 0010 FILM 5 3W PW 28480 80WLV 0811 1856 FXD FILM 250 5 5W 28480 80WHV 0811 1805 FXD FILM 1 5K 5 3W 28480 R412 40WLV 80WLV 0699 1972 FXD FILM 1 74M 1 1 8W 28480 40WHV 80WHV 0698 4536 FXD FILM 340K 176 1 8W 28480 R413 40WLV 40WHV NOT USED 80WLV 0683 4715 FXD FILM 470 5 1 4W 01121 CB4715 80WHV 0683 2025 FXD FILM 2K 5 1 4W 28480 R414 R415 NOT USED R416 40WLV 40WHV NOT USED 80WLV 0811 3751 FXD FILM 07 5 2W 28480 80WHV 0811 3752 FXD FILM 18 5 2W 28480 R417 NOT USED R418 0757 0469 FXD FILM 150K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 1530F R419 0698 4435 FXD FILM 2 49K 1 1 8W 28480 R420 0683 3305 FXD FILM 33 5 1 4W 01121 CB3305 R421 0698 3449 F
149. XD FILM 28 7 1 1 2W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 2872F R422 0698 8827 FXD FILM 1M 1 1 8W 28480 R423 0757 0401 FXD FILM 100 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 101F R424 NOT USED R425 0757 0413 FXD FILM 392 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 392RF R426 40WLV 40WHV 0757 0427 FXD FILM 1 5K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4F 8 TOF501F 80WHV 80WLV 0757 0422 FXD FILM 909 1 1 8W 28480 R427 40WLV 80WHV 0698 4123 FXD FILM 499 1 1 8W 28480 40WHV 0698 3444 FXD FILM 316 1 1 8W 28480 80WLV 0698 4457 FXD FILM 576 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 10 576RF R428 0757 0405 FXD FILM 162 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 162RF R429 430 0757 0439 FXD FILM 6 81K 1 1 8W 28480 R431 0698 8827 FXD FILM 1M 1 1 8W 28480 R432 0698 3449 FXD FILM 28 7K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 2872F R433 40WLV 0757 0290 FXD FILM 6 19K 1 1 8W 28480 40WHV 0757 0439 FXD FILM 6 81K 1 1 8W 28480 80WLV 0698 0083 FXD FILM 1 96K 1 1 8W 16299 80WHV 0698 3279 FXD FILM 4 99K 1 1 8W 28480 R434 0757 0442 FXD FILM 10K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 1002F R435 0757 0283 FXD FILM 2K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 2001F R436 0683 4735 FXD FILM 47K 5 1 4W 01121 CB4735 R437 0698 4480 FXD FILM 15 8K 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 1582F R438 0698 3156 FXD FILM 14 7 1 1 8W 16299 CT4 1 8 T0 1472F R439 0757 0280 FILM 1K 1 1 8W 16299 1 8 0 1001 440 0699 0811 FXD FILM 33K 1 28480 R441 0698 6414 FXD FILM 1K 1 1 8W 28480 R442 0698 8913 FXD FILM 1 5M 1 1 8W 28480 5 18 Table 5 7 Output BoardParts List continued Desig
150. a aaa menn nennen rene 2 9 2 5 Outpot Board Power Mesh and Control Circuits Block 1 nennen nnne 2 12 2 6 Voltage and Current Control Circuits Simplified Schematic 2 13 2 7 Typical Output Range Characteristics 2 15 28 Typical Downprogramming Characteristics Below 2 0 2 mene nnne 2 16 2 9 Overvoltage Protection Circuits Block 1 1 rr 2 18 3 1 Operating Ranges Available in Models 6621A 6624A and 6627A meme nne enhn nennen 3 3 3 2 Current Monitoring Resistor 3 4 3 3 Basic Test ZU Ai 3 5 3 4 Down Programming Speed Test 3 7 3 5 CV Down Programming Speed Test 1 200 hen ren rne nnne ne nnne nennen nnn 37 3 6 CV UP Programming Speed Test nn 37 3 7 CV Up Programming Speed Test 5 aaa aaa 1 aaa aaa nennen hene nn rhe hen ree rh en nnne nennen nnne 3 8 3 8 Transient Recovery Time Test Setup saan aaa he hine ren rne n
151. a lower voltage up to the indicated level must have occurred e g THERM pin 14 is HIGH only when the voltage increases to a level 22 8 V 30 3 V 6 Indicates that hysteresis is involved in the trip voltage level and a transition from a higher voltage down to the indicated level must have occurred eg THERM pin 14 is LOW only when the voltage decreases to a level 2 5 V 0 15 V 4 51 OV pin 12 This open collector output pin goes High when STATUS SELECT pin 11 is Low and the OV SENSE pin 13 is Low The Low state of pin 13 indicates an overvoltage condition OV is open circuited when STATUS SELECT is High OV SENSE pin 13 When an overvoltage occurs pin 9 on the power module goes Low this input pin goes Low which causes OV pin 12 to go High when STATUS SELECT pin 11 is Low THERM pin 14 This input signal when Low indicating an overtemperature condition causes OT pin 15 to go High when STATUS SELECT pin 11 is Low OT pin 15 This open collector output signal goes High when both the STATUS SELECT pin 11 and THERM pin 14 inputs are Low indicating an OT overtemperature condition OT is open circuited when STATUS SELECT is High CL LOOP pin 16 This input signal when Low indicates that the supply s output is in negative current limit Figure 4 19 shows how this signal is decoded causing CLO pin 10 to goLow 7 00 V pin 17 The 7 00 V bias voltage can range from 7 42 V
152. ansformer when 51 15 ON Depending on the line module setting the 120 VAC cooling fan either runs directly from the line or from the appropriate transformer tap The power transformer provides the main ac inputs to the output boards and also provides the ac inputs for the bias voltage supplies located on the GPIB board and each output board Ac power distribution is shown in detail in figure 6 1 in the rear of this manual 2 4 GPIB Board The GPIB board contains the GPIB interface system microcomputer output boards interface and front panel interface These circuits provide the interface between the 2 1 user and the multiple outputs of the power supply Each output board is actually an output channel that can be individually selected and controlled over the GPIB or from the supply s front panel The GPIB board interprets commands from the GPIB or from the front panel to control the selected output The GPIB board also processes measurement and status data received from the output boards This data may be read back to the controller over the GPIB and or displayed on the supply s front panel Also each output board can be individually calibrated over the GPIB using calibration commands See Appendix A in Operating Manual Correction factors are calculated during calibration and are stored in non volatile memory on the GPIB board The GPIB board is described in greater detail in paragraph 2 7 2 5 Front Panel Most of the remote operation
153. aph 4 8 b Use the same procedure outlined above but note that for 80 Watt boards 0338 and 0339 are a matched pair Therefore both power modules must be replaced if either module fails c Note that if an insulator is present under the heat sink assembly be sure to align it properly as outlined in paragraph 4 8 4 10 Front Panel Removal The front panel contains the keypad assembly LCD display assembly and the line switch You must remove the front panel in order to gain access to these components The LCD display and line switch are replaceable components On some units you may have to replace the front pand if the keypad is defective To remove the front panel assembly proceed as follows a Disconnect the keypad and display ribbon cables from P202 and P203 on the GPIB board Ensure that these cables are not pinched between the front panel and the chassis when reassembling b Remove the grounding screw nut located behind the front pand upper right corner or below display This nut is accessible through cut outs in the chassis Do not overtighten the grounding screw nut when replacing the front panel Remove the rack ears or vinyl trim from the sides of the front panel d Remove the two screws on each side of front panel e Slide the panel forward 4 11 Chassis Mounted Components The power transformer is fastened to a mounting bracket by mounting screws flat washers and shoulder washers Before removing the
154. arators are the CV LOOP CL LOOP and CL LOOP signals from the power control circuits see Figure 2 5 The outputs of the comparators are combined in logic circuits which then go into the set inputs of flip flops which hold the status of CVO CLO CLO and UNREG outputs UNREG is decoded if the output is not regulated by a CV or CL control loop The flip flops are set by any transition into a decoded state This generates a record of whether any of the conditions CV CL CL UNREG existed since the last time the flip 2 8 flops were reset The STATUS RESET input line from the microcomputer resets the flip flops The status monitor circuit also receives OV SENSE and THERM inputs The THERM signal is received from the power module s in the power mesh see Figure 2 5 and indicates when an overtemperature condition exists Note that when the microcomputer senses the overtemperature OT condition via data bus line D4 it shuts down the output This circuit resets automatically and restores the output approximately 30 seconds after the temperature drops sufficiently for safe operation The OV SENSE input signal indicates when the output s overvoltage detector circuit has been tripped and the output has been shut down see overvoltage detector description below The THERM and OV SENSE inputs control the OT and OV outputs of the status monitor N ote that the OT and OV status are not held in flip flops All of status monitor s
155. ards have two hybrids U338 and U339 connected in parallel receives three unregulated DC voltage levels on its high medium and low voltage input rails The power module contains series regulator stages an SCR overvoltage circuit a down programmer a built in overtemperature thermistor and a reverse output voltage protection diode Series Regulators Theseries regulator stages consist of series pass transistors which regulate the voltage received from the selected power rail The power module automatically selects the proper input rail depending upon the output voltage required For example if the low rail is supplying current and the output voltage exceeds the low rail minus about 2 5 V the medium rail begins to raise the voltage on the BYPASS input and supply current Finally if the output voltage exceeds the medium rail minus about 2 5 V the high rail will begin to supply current As stated previously the conduction of the series pass transistors is controlled by the BASE DRIVE and DRIVE inputs Normally there is about a diode drop between these two input pins The current sources drive the series regulator into conduction via the BASE DRIVE input The DRIVE input from the base drive circuit see paragraph 2 42 controls the amount of BASE DRIVE current that drives the series regulators in order to maintain a regulated output Any BASE DRIVE current from the current source that is not required by the series pass transistor t
156. ariable load resistor and switches The electronic load Tabie 3 1 Test Equipment Required for Verification Required Characteristics Recommended GPIB Controller Oscilloscope RMS Voltmeter Digital Voltmeter Current Monitor Resistor Resistor Figures 3 4 and 3 5 Diodes 2 Figures 3 4 and 3 5 Variable Voltage Transformer DC Power Supply Figure 3 6 Electronic Load or Variable Load Resistors and Load Switch Impedance matching Resistor Figure 3 3 Current Limiting Resistor Figure 3 10 Full GPIB capabilities Dual Channel Sensitivity 1 mV Bandwidth 20 MHz Input 50 ohms and 10 Meg True RMS Bandwidth 10 MHz Sensitivity 500 Resolution 100 nV Accuracy 0 0035 6 digit Value 0 1 ohm 10 amp Accuracy 0 05 or better 2 ohms 2 W 5 100 V 3 A Silicon diode Adjustable from 13 to 6 of input voltage range 1 VA minimum 60 30 V 15 Voltage Range 50 V minimum Current Range 10 A minimum Power Range 100 W minimum Open and Short switches variable at 30 Hz rate 0 to 1 ohm 100 W minimum 0 to 5 ohms 100 W minimum 0 to 100 ohms 100 W minimum 10 A switchable at line freq consists of see Figure 3 6 Relay Capacitor 0 474F 100 V Resistor 1 5 ohms 3 W Diodes 2 100 V 1A Resistor 10 K 3 W Resistor 25 K 2 W 50 ohm resistor 50 ohm coax or 1 1 probe with RF tip 1 ohm 5 watts min 3 2 A
157. cifications for the product or improper site preparation and maintenance OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AGILENT SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE THE CUSTOMERS SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES AGILENT SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY ASSISTANCE The above statements apply only to the standard product warranty Warranty options extended support contracts product maintenance agreements and customer assistance agreements are also available Contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service office for further information on Agilent s full line of Support Programs SAFETY SUMMARY The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation service and repair of this instrument Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design manufacture and intended use of the instrument Agilent Technologies assumes no liability for the customers failure to comply with these requirements BEFORE APPLYING POWER Verify that the product is set to match the available line voltage and the correct fuse is installed GROUND THE INSTRUMENT This product is a Safety Class 1 instrument provid
158. circuit and bias supplies Note that each 80 W output board has two power modules connected in parallel 13 84 14043 0 9 GUu08 104110 SUIG 2UA 1 DA SHO TO SU BUH HOU3 SNOLLBNIGHOO QUO LNdLNO R LIMOUID IPNI 28 S3LON Figure 2 1 Agilent 6621A 6624A and 6627A Multiple Output Power Supplies Block Diagram 2 2 LOW MaG a O Lu g T pe O gt BOTH RANGES HIGH CURRENT OUTPUT Low Range Rated Values 7 10 20V 4A High Range Rated Values 20V 4A 50V 2 A 20VQ2A 20V 2A 50 V 0 8 Figure 2 2 Output Operating Ranges for the Agilent Models 6621 6624 and 6627 The ac input to each output board is rectified filtered and applied to the power module regulator Each output board employs series regulation techniques The regulator element is connected in series with the load and operates in the linear region between saturation and cutoff of the transistor characteristic curve Regulation is achieved by varying the conduction of the series element in response to changes in the line voltage or the load The constant voltage CV control circuit compares the voltage at the output with a reference voltage and generates a control signal which varies the conduction of the series regulator to raise or lower the output voltage as required The constant current CC control circuit compares the volta
159. control the output voltage output current and overvoltage setting Various status and operating conditions are read back on the data bus The microcomputer also generates address and control signals which are used by other interface circuits The interrupt input to the microcomputer is used in conjunction with analog multiplexer U323 and DAC 0321 to perform a succesive approximation A D conversion in order to readback output voltage and current values as well as various test point voltages 2 27 Address Decoder This circuit 0320 decodes addresses sent by the miarocomputer and generates the appropriate chip select signal CSO CS3 to select which circuit sends or receives data CSO selects the status monitor part of U327 to send status data back to the microcomputer on data bus lines 00 05 CS1 CS3 determine which DAC will receive data 51 selects the CV 12 bit DAC CS2 selects the CC OV dual 8 bit DAC and CS3 selects the readback 12 bit DAC 2 7 2 28 CV DAC The constant voltage CV 12 bit DAC 0313 and amplifier U315A convert the digital input into an analog signal CV REF in the range of 0 to 10 V This signal is used as a reference voltage and is sent to the voltage control circuits see paragraph 2 43 to set the output voltage to the programmed value CV REF is also sent to the analog multiplexer so that it can be measured during power on self test The 12 bit DAC internally formulates the 12 bit DAC data from
160. cord and builtin resistor is recommended such as 3M Co No 1066 Agilent Part No 9300 0969 small wrist size and 9300 0970 large Do not wear a conductive wrist strap when working with potentials in excess of 500 volts the one megohm resistor will provide insufficient current limiting for personal safety g All grounding device being repaired test equipment soldering iron work surface wrist strap etc should be done to the same point h Do not wear synthetic eg nylon clothing Keep dothing of any kind from coming within 12 inches of static sensitive devices i Low impedance test equipment signal generators logic pulsers etc should be connected to static sensitive inputs only whilethe components are powered j Use mildly activated rosin core solder such as Alpha Metal Reliacor No 1 Agilent Part No 8090 0098 for repair The flux residue of this type of solder can be left on the printed circuit board Generally it is safer not to clean the printed circuit board after repair Do not use Freon or other types of spray cleaners If necessary the printed circuit board can be brushed using a natural bristle brush only Do not use nylon bristle or other synthetic bristle brushes Do not use high velocity air blowers unless ionized k Keep the work area free of non conductive objects such as Styrofoam type cups polystyrenefoam poly ethylene bags and plastic wrappers Non conductive devices that are necessary
161. cuitry associated with that one input is probably defective see Figure 6 3 4 30 Understanding and Troubleshooting the Signal Processor U 327 This custom IC processes both analog and digital signals to interface the microcomputer U312 with the power mesh and control circuits The signal processor circuits can be functionally divided into three areas overvoltage and driver power on start up and status monitor circuits A general description of this IC is provided in paragraph 2 32 The following information will help you troubleshoot the three signal processor functions Proper operation of the IC can be verified by measuring the pin voltages and using Table 4 16 which lists the voltage levels and defines the low and high states This information is used in conjunction with the pin descriptions paragraph 4 31 and simplified schematics to troubleshoot the signal processor s overvoltage Figure 4 17 power on start up Figure 4 18 and status monitor circuits Figure 4 19 Additional troubleshooting information for the status monitor circuit is given in paragraph 4 32 and Figure 4 20 4 50 4 31 Signal Processor U327 Pin Function Descriptions The signal processor s circuits are shown on the functional schematic of Figure 6 3 sheet 1 and on the block diagram of Figure 2 4 The 28 signal processor pins are described as follows 5V pin 1 The 5 V bias voltage can range from 4 72 V to 5 23 OV COMP 2 The OV
162. d where specifies the particular output board 1 4 2 36 Power On Circuit and Current Sources The power on circuit U341A and 0319 is used to turn on the current source transistors and the bleed circuit see paragraph 2 40 which is connected across the output of the supply The power on circuit is activated when it receives the ON OFF signal 2 V level from the signal processor 0327 The current sources U 336 on 40W boards Q326 329 on 80W boards are a series of transistors connected to the high rail When activated by the power on circuit the current sources supply a few milliamps to the BASE DRIVE of the power module and to the power module reference voltage circuit The BASE DRIVE in conjunction with the DRIVE signal see base drive circuit description below controls the conduction of the series pass elements in the power module 2 10 2 37 Power M odule Reference Voltage When the current sources have been turned on this circuit P O U340 and U337 provides a reference voltage about 2V above V to the power module REF input The REF input is used by an internal control circuit that allows switching between the low medium and high rails The reference circuit includes a transistor P O U340 that turns on when the current source apply power a programmable reference U337 which provides the reference voltage and bypass capacitors C366 and 0367 2 38 Power Module The power module hybrid U 338 SOW output bo
163. d Roe peo jarl 21 LOOP LT LOOP 16 cL LOOP R349 CL LOOP 3 D UNREG CL_LOOP SENSE 8 9 09K R352 OUT ENB OV_SENSE 53 4 1 NNV 2 55 POU_DIS CAP_IN 6 81K 2 4 ON OFF sia 25 Rana d STATUS RESET 7 THERM 14 STRT RE 1 4 THERM UDD s 50 STAT_SEL UCC 58 150 PCLR VEE 25 P 15U UBB s 5 75V GND 55 C350 C347 C349 C348 C346 C432 C359 GND 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 3 TOOOPF 4200PF 1 560 560 560 500 150 1000 1000 1 DU GATE 4 LU ONLY R357 C427 DM R500 CR35e 0835 R501 CR358 R496 RAD RA 00 TERM MN C425 0 100 5x 150 426 130 100 R520 WA a U354 2200PF 1000 BRE C419 19 MC34062 1000 UR316 5 1 5 SENSE UCC 1744 aid R502 NC A 4 Ne 5 PRIVE 30U 5 TB1 0V 4 1744 00 lt 421 5 134 R494 NL CR359 R495 R497 RS14 6 lurere OUTPUT 0429 HV ONLY 1 00 4 701 D UTRIP 22 1000 C418 21 5 16 2K 390 5 2 49K 3 UTRIP 500 4 52 UR315 R493 1N5817 1744 R503 AN 2 21K SHOTTKY LU ONLY C440 459 C422 101 6 490 L SZ 21 5K R508 Af 1000 N N 10M zzz 2200PF 2200 ZONE 5x 015 1000 1000 1 24 2500 FIXED 0 9 CIRCUIT Figure 6 4 Output 3 amp 4 Board Schematic Diagram sheet 2 of 4 REMOTE OV TRIP
164. d screw and through the GPIB connector When checking the GPIB board with an oscilloscope be sure that the scope s ground is connected only to a ground point on the GPIB board itself Connecting the scope ground to any other point on the GPIB board may result in damage to the supply Message Error Code R ERR key ERR query Explanation and Remedy Calibration was attempted with jumper W201 installed in the CAL LOCKOUT position of connector P201 on the HP IB board see Figure 4 2 Install W201 in the NORM RUN position and recalibrate if desired No errors were detected The timer on the HP IB board failed Microprocessor U201 or real time clock U208 could be defective Perform the HP IB troubleshooting procedures see paragraph 4 18 The RAM U207 on the HP IB board failed self test see paragraph 4 18 The ROM U206 on the HP IB board failed self test see paragraph 4 18 4 20 Post Repair Calibration If the GPIB board is replaced or it is repaired by replacing the EEPROM chip U211 each output in the supply must be recalibrated as described in Appendix A of the Operating Manual Since the EEPROM provides non volatile storage of the supply s Model number and GPIB address you must reassign these values before the calibration procedures can be performed on the new or repaired GPIB board The GPIB address is set manually using the front panel ADDR key as described in Section III of the Operati
165. dary Interface Circuits and Power Mesh and Control Circuits The block diagrams illustrate the major circuits and signal flow on an output board Complete circuit details are shown on the output board functional schematic Figure 6 3 in the rear of the manual The functional names on the block diagrams correspond with those on the functional schematic 2 25 Secondary Interface Circuits Figure 2 4 These circuits receive digital signals from the GPIB board and convert them to analog signals voltages which are sent to the power mesh and control circuits to program the output voltage output current and overvoltage Measurement and status signals are sent back to the secondary interface circuits from the power mesh and control circuits to be processed before they are sent on to the GPIB board and then to the GPIB controller and or the front panel The following paragraphs describe the interface circuits shown in Figure 2 4 2 26 Microcomputer This 8 bit microcomputer 0312 contains a CPU ROM and RAM These internal circuits process all data that is transferred between the GPIB board and the power mesh and control circuits on the output board GPIB board data is transferred serially via optical isolators which connect incoming data to an input port on the microcomputer and outgoing data to an output port on the microcomputer On the output board side the microcomputer uses an 8 bit parallel bidirectional data bus to program DACs which
166. e foren P2088 00000000 fe C NORMAL RUN POSITION SIGNATURE ANALYSIS SA PINS AND 4 ON P205 P208 JUMPER PACK W202 15 POSITION ARE SHORTED FOR S A TESTS INSTALLED IN J202 FOR JUMPER W201 IS INSTALLED SEE FIG 4 8A SA TESTS 3 THROUGH 8 BETWEEN P201 5 AND P201 6 P205 206 287 208 CONNECTOR DETAIL PC BOARD CONNECTOR Figure 4 8 Signature Analysis Test Setup 4 19 Table 4 6 GPIB Board S A Test No 1 Description This test checks Microprocessor 0201 address lines A0 A15 and Address Decoder 0208 215 chip select lines CS1 CS8 Test Setup Use the test setup described in paragraph 4 23 Connect jumper pack W202 in the NOP position and set up the signature analyzer as shown below Signature Analyzer P201 PIN Input i Connection START STOP CLOCK GND 9 10 13 4 Measurements Use the data probe to take signatures for each circuit at the output pins listed below Circuit Output Signature 5V P201 1 0003 U201 8 Microprocessor Address Bus Lines Address Decoder U208 U215 Chip Select Lines 4 20 Table 4 7 GPIB Board S A Test No 2 Description This test checks the ROM U206 and the data bus to the output of the Data Latches U217 in the system microcomputer Test Setup Use the test setup described in paragraph 4 23 Connect jumper pack W202 in the NOP and set up the signature analyzer as shown below Signature Analyzer Edge P201 PIN Input Setting C
167. e Cal Lockout position tells the microprocessor to respond to calibration commands or a logic 0 Jumper W201 is installed in the Cal Lockout position tells the microprocessor to ignore calibration commands This jumper provides security against unauthorized calibration A logic 1 this buffer input is hardwired A logic 0 this buffer input is hardwired D1 D2 D3 buffer outputs are held in the high impedance state disconneding it from the data bus when CS4 is not decoded 2 23 Bias Supply and Start U p Circuit The bias supply 0218 provides 5 V bias power to operate the circuits on the GPIB board The start up circuit U220 U222 generates the PON signal delayed 5 V which is used to power the optical isolators on the output boards The OPTO PON signal is initially held low for approximately 100 ms to prevent the erroneous transfer of data at power on The start up circuit also generates PCLR power clear and EEPON EEPROM power on signals when power is turned on The PCLR signal is held low at power on to initialize the talker listener and microprocessor chips The EEPON signal is held low at power on to disable the EEPROM dock Thus the start up circuit delays turning on the microprocessor and optoisolators until the bias voltages have stabilized If the line voltage drops after the unit has been turned on the start up circuit will again generate the low level signals to disable the interface and
168. e Protect Circuit This circuit P U340 and P U 341 monitors the voltage from V to S and from Sto V If either of these voltages exceeds 1 5 V the sense protect circuit will generate the SENSE PROTECT signal which will fire the overvoltage protection circuits and shut down the output see paragraph 2 47 This circuit prevents the output voltage from being regulated at a value higher than the maximum value for which it was designed Notice also that the series combination of R509 and R487 comprise the positive sense protect resistor and the series combination of R512 and R483 comprises the negative sense protect resistor the case of open sense leads these resistors allow the power supply to effectively switch to the local sensing mode 2 42 Base Drive Circuit When activated ON OFF is at approximately 2 volts this circuit Q335 and U348 provides the DRIVE input to the series regulator and current sink transistors in the power module The DRIVE input determines how much drive current BASE DRIVE the power module will receive The DRIVE input is controlled by either the voltage control CV current control CL or negative current limit circuits CL TheCV or CL signal controls the base drive circuit via OR gate diodes CR351 or CR348 to generate the DRIVE signal in order to control the conduction of the series regulators in the power module and provide a regulated output If the output is less than t
169. e Read Only Memory Field Effect Transistor Flip Flop Full Wave Fixed Ground General Purpose Header Heatsink Integrated Circuit Impedance Inductor Insulator Isolator Liquid Crystal Display Light Emitting Diode Lockwasher Low Speed Machine Metalized Paper Metalized Polycarbonate Module Metal Oxide Semi Conductor Microprocessor Unit Mounting Mutliplexer Negative Channel Metal Oxide Semiconductor Oscillator Printed Circuit Board Plastic Panel Programmed Random Access Memory Rectifier Register Resistor REGULATOR Read Only Memory Screw Table 5 3 Description of Abbreviations SHLD Shoulder STDF Standoff TAN Tantalum TBAX Tube Axial VAR Variable VLTG REG Voltage Regulator WASH Washer WW Wire Wound XFMR Transformer XSTR Transistor ZNR Zener Table 5 4 Federal Manufacturer Codes Code Manufacturer 01121 Allen Bradley Company Milwaukee Wi 16299 Corning Glass Works Raleigh NC 07263 Fairchild Semiconductor Corp Hicksville NY 28480 Hewlett Packard Company Palo Alto Ca 80795 ITT New York NY 81483 International Rectifier Los Angeles Ca 19701 Mepco Electro Corp Mineral Wells Tx 04713 Motorola Semiconductor products Phoenix Az 27014 National Semiconductor Corp Santa Clara Ca 17896 Siliconxs Santa Clara Ca 56289 Sprague Electric Company North Adams Mass 01281 TRW Inc Philadelphia Pa 01295 Texas Instruments Inc Semi Div Dallas Tx 5 3
170. e Voltage as indicated on the front panel display Check that the CC annunciator is on If it is not adjust the load so the output voltage drops slightly e Record the output current reading DVM reading X 10 f Close the short switch and record the output current reading The difference in the current readings in steps e and f is the load effect and should not exceed the values listed below for the particular output being tested Output CC Load Effect 40WLV lmA 80WLV 2mA 40WHV 0 5 mA 80WHV lmA 3 12 g Repeat this test steps a through f for each output in your supply 3 26 CC Source Effect This test measures the change in output current that results when the ac line voltage changes from the minimum to the maximum value within the specifications a Turn off the supply and connect the ac power line through a variable voltage transformer b Connect the output to be tested as shown in Figure 3 3 with the DVM connected across the current monitoring resistor the load switch closed and the short switch opened c Adjust the transformer to 13 below the nominal line voltage d Turn on the supply and select the output to be tested OUTPUT SELECT key on thefront pand e Program the current of the selected output to the High Range Full Scale Current value and the output voltage to the High Range Maximum Programmable Voltage value see Table 3 3 by sending the following strings ISET lt ch gt lt 2 8 or 4 gt V
171. e applicable test s given in Section III of this manual to ensure that the supply meets all specifications 1 1 Replaceable Parts Section provides a listing of replaceable parts for all electronic components and mechanical assemblies Circuit Diagrams Section VI contains functional schematics and component location diagrams The names that appear on the functional schematics also appear on the block diagrams in Section II Thus the descriptions in Section II can be correlated with both the block diagrams and the schematics Logic Symbology Appendix A gives a brief description of the logic symbols used on the functional schematics Fault Indicator FLT and Remote inhibit INH A fault indicator and remote inhibit circuit which provide additional shutdown protection should either the GPIB and or controller fail are available optionally See a separate document entitled Appendix E Option 750 Operating Instructions for the Multiple Output Linear System DC Power Supply Agilent M odels 6621A 6624A and 6627A Agilent P N 5957 6372 Computer Interface Intermediate Language CIIL Control Interface Intermediate Language CIIL programming capabilities Option 700 are also available as an option A separate document entitled Supplies Option 700 Agilent P N 5957 6371 describes the CIIL option 12 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS This product is a Safety Class 1 instrument which means that it is provided with a protective earth
172. e nearest you When ordering parts indude the following information a TheAgilent Technologies part number b A description of the part c Thequantity desired d The model number Agilent 6621A 6622A 6623A 6624 6627A in which the part is used If you wish to order a part directly from the manufacturer locate the manufacturer s Federal Supply Code and corresponding address in Table 5 4 Table 5 2 Reference Designators Blower fan Capacitor Diode Fuse Jack Inductor Plug Transistor Resistor Thermal Resistor Transformer Switch Terminal Block Integrated Circuit Voltage Regulator Zener Diode Wire Oscillator m c F L Q R R T 5 T U V m lt Table 5 3 Description of Abbreviations ANLG ASSY AWG BAR BLK BNDPOST BOT BRDG CER CHAS COMP CONN CORR CUSHD DAC DBLCHAM DIO EEPROM ELECT EPROM FET FF FW FXD GND GP HDR HS IC IMP INDTR INSUL ISO LCD LED LKWR LS MACH METPA METPOL MOD MOS MPU MTG MUXR NMOS OSC PCB PLSTC PNL PROGMD RAM RECT REGIS RES RGLTR ROM SCR Analog Assembly American Wire Gauge Barrier Block Binding Post Bottom Bridge Ceramic Chassis Carbon Film Composition Connector Corrugated Container Cushioned Digital to Analog Converter Double Chamber Diode Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Electrolytic Erasable Programmabl
173. e output voltage that appears between 5 and S not between V and V Use coaxial cable or shielded 2 wire cable to avoid noise pickup on the test leads 3 12 Voltage Programming and Readback Accuracy This test verifies that the voltage programming GPIB readback and front panel display functions are within specifications An GPIB controller must be used for this test 3 4 a Turn off the supply and connect a digital voltmeter between the S and S terminals of the output to be tested b Turn on the supply and select the desired output OUTPUT SELECT key on the front panel c Program the selected output channel to zero volts by sending the string VSET lt ch gt 0 Record the output voltage readings on the digital voltmeter DVM and the front pand display The readings should be within the limits specified below for the particular output type tested Also note that the display indicates the output current and the CV RMT and ADDR annunciators are on Note that the output current reading is approximately zero because there is no load connected Display Accuracy Output DVM Reading Front Panel LCD 40WLV 80WLV OV 19mV DVM 25mV 40WH V 80WH V OV 50mV DVM 55mV e Read back the output voltage from the selected channel the GPIB by entering and running the following program 10 OUTPUT 705 VOUT lt ch gt 20ENTER 705 A 30 DISP A 40END f Record the value displayed o
174. e tested as shown in Figure 3 3 with the DVM connected across the current monitoring resistor the load switch dosed and the short switch opened Connect the supply to the ac power line through a variable voltage transformer and adjust it for the nominal value b Turn on the supply and select the output to be tested OUTPUT SELECT key on front panel c Program the current of the selected output to the Low Range Full Scale Current value and the output voltage to the Low Range Maximum Programmable Voltage value See Table 3 2 d Adjust the load until the output enters the CC mode with the displayed output voltage slightly less than the Low Range Full Scale Voltage value The CC annuciator must be on e Adjust the transformer to 1396 below the nominal line voltage f Wait 30 minutes for the output to stabilize under these conditions and record the output current DVM reading X 10 9 Adjust the transformer to 6 above the nominal line voltage h Wait 30 minutes and record the output current The difference in the readings taken in steps f and h should be less than the values given below for the particular output type being tested Output Drift 40WLV 9 5 mA 80WLV 19 mA 40WHV 6 2 mA 80WHV 12 4 mA i Close the short switch and immediately record the output current j Wait 30 minutes and again record the output current The difference in the readings taken in steps i and j should be less than the values given in step h for the
175. eadback 12 bit DAC U321 and amplifier U315D convert the digital input signal from the microcomputer to an analog signal in the range of 0 to 10 V The 12 bit DAC internally formulates the 12 bit DAC data from the 8 bit 20 07 data bus same as the CV DAC described above The output of the DAC and the output of the analog multiplexes are applied to the signal comparator The readback DAC under the control of the microcomputer successively approximates the value of the multiplexer s output to a 12 bit resolution Starting from the most significant bit each bit is successively compared to the multiplexer s output and is kept or discarded depending on whether its value is less than or greater than the multiplexer s output Each comparison successive approximation is evaluated by the microcomputer via its INT input The microcomputer maintains a running total of the approximations which when complete represents the value of the analog multiplexer s output 2 32 Signal Processor This special purpose IC U327 processes both analog and digital signals to interface the microcomputer with the power mesh and control circuits The circuits can be functionally divided into status monitor overvoltage detector and driver and power on start up circuits Status Monitor This circuit consists of comparators to monitor the control loops logic to decode these input lines and flip flops to catch and hold changes The inputs to the status comp
176. ear in the prefix separated by commas In this example X is controlled by G1 and G2 Figure A 8 AND Dependency Notation When an EN input is active the output is enabled to function normally When an EN input is inactive the output becomes a high impedance effectively removing that device from the circuit Figure A 9 Enable Dependency Notation A 5 Application of dependency notation is accomplished by 1 labelling the input affecting other inputs or outputs with the letter symbol denoting the relationship involved followed by appropriately chosen identifying number and 2 labelling each input or output affected by the affecting input with that same number If it is the complement of the internal logic state of the affecting input or output that does the affecting a bar is placed over the identifying number at the affected input or output If the affected input or output requires label to denote its function this label shall be prefixed by the identifying number of the affecting input If an input or output is affected by more than one affecting input the identifying numbers of each of the affecting inputs shall appear in the label of the affected one separated by commas The left to right reading order of these identifying numbers is the same as the sequence of the affecting relationships Two affecting inputs labelled with different letters shall not have the same identifying number unless o
177. ed by the fixed OV sensing circuit or by a remote signal connected to the output s OV and OV terminals Fixed Overvoltage Sensing Circuit The fixed overvoltage sensing circuit U354 continually monitors the voltage across the output terminals Because it is biased by the voltage at the output terminals it can be adivated and provide protection even when the supply is not connected to the ac power line The fixed overvoltage sensing circuit will activate when it senses a voltage that is approximately 120 of the maximum rated output voltage for the associated output If the output voltage exceeds this threshold the OV GATE signal is generated via diode CR358 and fires the SCR Note that the fixed overvoltage sensing circuit will also activate the OV DRIVE signal via diode CR359 REMOTE OV TRIP The OV DRIVE signal then transmits the overvoltage condition to the OV terminals via diode CR356 and transformer T301 as previously described 2 17 Remote O vervoltage Trip Any output s OV can be triggered from its OV terminals by connection to a remote device see Operating Manual or another output s OV terminals By connecting the OV terminals of up to 8 outputs together an overvoltage shut down on any of the outputs will also trigger the OV and shutdown the remaining outputs As shown in Figure 2 9 the trip signal enters at the OV terminals and is coupled through pulse transformer T301 diode CR360 and the overvoltage detect
178. ed with a protective earth terminal To minimize shock hazard the instrument chassis and cabinet must be connected to an electrical ground The instrument must be connected to the ac power supply mains through a three conductor power cable with the third wire firmly connected to an electrical ground safety ground at the power outlet For instruments designed to be hard wired to the ac power lines supply mains connect the protective earth terminal to a protective conductor before any other connection is made Any interruption of the protective grounding conductor or disconnection of the protective earth terminal will cause a potential shock hazard that could result in personal injury If the instrument is to be energized via an external autotransformer for voltage reduction be certain that the autotransformer common terminal is connected to the neutral earthed pole of the ac power lines supply mains FUSES Only fuses with the required rated current voltage and specified type normal blow time delay etc should be used Do not use repaired fuses or short circuited fuseholders To do so could cause a shock or fire hazard DO NOT OPERATE IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable gases or fumes KEEP AWAY FROM LIVE CIRCUITS Operating personnel must not remove instrument covers Component replacement and internal adjustments must be made by qualified service personnel Do not replace compone
179. em 26 36 no R450 4000 HU0160 5410 za gt 2N4393 1M HU0160 6826 C411 3300 500 0252 01 2500 28 7K R513 0451 R486 509 HU0757 0460 15K 24 3K CL LOOP G R479 61 9K HV0698 4493 4 75K gt CRZ52 1 1 su CL TOGGLE 1N645 HU0698 6260 HU0252 0469 mm rags 198 14 150 150K 100U R464 406 00 TERM z 40K SENSE 2 4 ANN po 4 4 Ax P 0 TB1 3 ws 1 36 5K HU0699 1211 1 R462 NY 95K 1x 2 p X 9 09K CRS R422 3 Nals ids 6 435 715 405 ak 1 5M R452 ON OFF 1000 35 75 CR346 1 7528554 HU0160 4802 2461 C401 2425 C387 Sz JE R469 33PF 100U 1 R455 20K 1 15U R465 47K 5 100bF 100 01 lt 015 R451 Ne U REF 1 AAA 1044 1000 1000 V 15 8K 50U 1009 5 R467 90 9K LU0160 4822 R463 R458 1000PF 100U 20K 1 R468 4 99K 10K NY 70 R466 0402 H wy 10K 7033 VY F30 1x 2000 2 00160 68356 5 ni DEE 0 5A 01 2500 8 gt 2110 03 6 T p 0 2508 215 R470 R412 FET DOWNPROGRAMMER A 20K T 74M R471 OUT TERM 3 16M AA ian gt HU0698 4536 DRE BULEER 34 RA36 PARED CL CONTROL 4 a 1 DRIVE SINK 4 BLEED SINK BLEED CIRCUIT C436 CL LOOP O gt 6 HUPURCH 01535 2200PF 63U DAC 0 TO 10U U READBACK Figure 6 5 Output 1 amp 2 80W Board Schematic Diagram sheet 3 of 4 6 24
180. erating Manual The information in each manual covers five models 6621 6624 and 6627A The main differences between the models are the number and type of outputs each mode contains These differences are specified in each of the manuals The following is a listing of the information contained in this manual with a brief description concerning its scope and purpose Principles of Operation Section provides block diagram level descriptions of the supply s circuits The GPIB interface digital circuits the power control analog and digital circuits and power output analog circuits are described These descriptions are intended as an aid in troubleshooting Verification Section III contains test procedures that check the operation of the supply to ensure that it meets the specifications given in Section of the Operating manual Troubleshooting Section IV contains board level troubleshooting procedures to isolate a malfunction to a defective board GPIB or output board or assembly front panel power transformer or cable assembly Additional troubleshooting procedures are provided to isolate the fault to a defective component on the board Board and assembly level removal and replacement procedures are also given in this section NOTE Calibration is generally required after a repair is made Software calibration procedures are given in Appendix A of the Operating M anual After calibration is completed perform th
181. g the trigger on Channel A as in step f Note that the diode clamp used in the test setup of Figure 3 4 prevents gross overload of Channel which is set at 50 mV div allowing examination of the tail of the exponential waveform The output voltage should be within 20 mV of its final settling value on the bottom horizontal line in less than 2 msec for 40WLV 80WLV outputs and within 50 mV in less than 6 msec for 40 WHV 80 WHV outputs Refer to the Channel B waveform shown in Figure 3 5 i Repeat steps a through h for each output in your supply CHAN RO TRIGGER CHAN Bo Figure 3 4 Down Programming Speed Test Setup CHANNEL B SQmV DIV CHANNEL SV OR 1 V DIV TRIGGER 1 PROGRAMMING RESPONSE TIME lt 2mS FOR 4 8 V 696 FOR 4OMHV BOMEIV 1 TIME CONSTANT lt 25 uS FOR 4 NLV B NLV lt 750 5 FOR 42WHV BOWHV TIME BASE 2mS DIV FOR 4 NLV B NLV ImS DIV FOR 4Q WHV 8QHHV Figure 3 5 CV Down Programming Speed Test Waveforms 3 7 3 17 CV Up Programming Speed This test measures the time required for the output voltage to rise to 63 of the High Range Full Scale Voltage time constant Also measured is the time the output takes to change from 4 volts to full scale and settle within the specified settling band response time a Turn off the supply and connect the output to be tested as shown in Figure 3 6 b Turn on the supply and select the output to be tested OUTPUT SELE
182. ge at the current monitor resistor with a reference and likewise varies the conduction of the series regulator The interface circuit on the output board receives digital signals from the GPIB board and converts them to analog signals reference voltages which are sent to the control circuit to program the output voltage and current The output boards can be commanded to send measurement and status data back to the GPIB controller and or to the display on the front panel The data is sent back via the secondary interface circuit and the appropriate circuits on the GPIB board The output board is able to sink current as well as source current Current sink limits are fixed at values approximately ten percent higher than the maximum current source limit for the particular output voltage operating point See Figure 2 7 for typical current source and sink characteristics The output board circuits are described in greater detail in paragraph 2 24 2 7 GPIB BOARD FIGURE 2 3 Figure 2 3 illustrates the major circuits and signal flow on the GPIB board Complete circuit details are shown on the functional schematic Figure 6 2 in the rear of this manual 2 3 The functional names on the block diagram correspond with those on the schematic so that the diagrams can be correlated As shown in Figure 2 3 the major circuits consist of the GPIB interface the system micro computer the output boards interface and the front panel interface circ
183. gilent 9825 85 or series 200 computer Agilent 1740A Rohde and Schwarz Model URE or Agilent 3400A Agilent 3456A Agilent 0811 3775 L amp N 4221 B Agilent 0764 0025 Agilent 1901 0719 or Agilent 1901 1087 Agilent 6274B Agilent 6274B Transistor Dev DLP 50 60 1000 Clare HGP 1002 Agilent 0160 5286 Agilent 0811 1220 Agilent 1901 0719 or 1901 1087 Agilent 0811 1816 Agilent 2100 3272 Agilent 0811 0592 Agilent 0811 1340 OUTPUT 2 88WLV OUTPUT 2 B KHV OUTPUT 1 S KLV OUTPUT 1 8QWHV Agilent 6621A Agilent 6622A OUTPUT B NLV OUTPUT 4QWLV OUTPUT 4 40WHV OUTPUT 3 4 KHV OUTPUT 404 Agilent 6623A Agilent 6624A Agilent 6627 Output Low Range High Range Rated Values Rated Values HIGH 7 10 20V 4A RANGE 20 V 50 V A BOTH LOW RANGES RANGE 7V 95A 20V92A HIGH 20V 924A 50V 0 8 CURRENT OUTPUT Figure 3 1 Operating Ranges Available in Agilent Models 6621A 6624A and 6627A VOLTAGE OUTPUT 3 3 is considerably easier to use than load resistors It eliminates the need for connecting resistors or rheostats in parallel to handle power it is much more stable than a carbon pile load and it makes easy work of switching between load conditions as is required for the load regulation and load transient response tests Substitution of the electronic load requires minor changes to the test procedures in this section 3 8 onitoring Resisto
184. gilent Part Description Mfg Mfg No Code Part No C380 40WLV 40WHV NOT USED 80WLV 0180 4037 80WHV 0180 4139 C381 0180 0230 FXD ELECT 1uF 50V 10 TAN 56289 150D105X0050A2 C382 40WLV 40WHV NOT USED 80WLV 80WHV 0160 4831 FXD CER 4700uF 10 100VDC 28480 C383 384 0160 4791 FXD CER 10pF 5 100V 28480 C385 0160 4812 FXD CER 220pF 5 100VDC 28480 C386 0160 4820 FXD CER 1800pF 5 100VDC 28480 C387 0160 4832 FXD CER 0 01uF 10 100VDC 28480 C388 40WLV 80WLV 0160 4813 FXD CER 180pF 5 100VDC 28480 40WHV 80WHV 0160 4801 FXD 100pF 5 100VDC 28480 C389 0160 5098 FXD CER 0 22uF 10 50VDC 24546 05 224 050 C390 0160 4820 FXD CER 1800pF 5 100VDC 28480 C391 0160 4812 FXD CER 220pF 576 100VDC 28480 C392 0160 5166 CER 0 015uF 20 100VDC 28480 C393 40WLV 80WLV 0160 5410 FXD CER 3300pF 5 50VDC 28480 40WHV 80WHV 0160 4832 FXD CER 0 01uF 10 28480 C394 0160 4807 FXD CER 33pF 5 100V 28480 C395 0160 5166 0 015uF 20 100VDC 28480 C396 0160 4832 FXD CER 0 01uF 10 100VDC 28480 C397 0160 5166 FXD 0 015uF 20 100VDC 28480 C398 40WLV 80WLV 0160 4822 FXD CER 1 000pF 5 100VDC 28480 40WHV 80WHV 0160 5409 FXD CER 3000pF 5 50VDC 28480 C399 0160 4805 FXD CER 47pF 5 100V 28480 C400 0160 4830 FXD CER 2200pF 10 100VDC 28480 C401 0160 4801 FXD CER 100pF 5 100VDC 28480 C402 40WLV 80WLV 0160 7320 FXD CER 0 01uF 2 5 28480 40WHV 80WHV 0160 7319 C403 404 NOT USED C405 406 0180 0291 FXD ELECT 1uF 10 35
185. gure 3 10 b Do not turn on the supply This test is performed with theac power turned off RC LINE oma WETTED 115 RELAY To avoid possible damage to the output under test the PDZ external supply should be current limited to less than 1 amp c Set the external power supply to 20 V for 40WLV 80WLV outputs or to 50 V for 40WH V 80WHV outputs d Slowly increase the voltage of the external supply until the overvoltage circuit in the supply under test trips This is indicated by a sudden drop in the voltage of the external supply The fixed OV circuit should trip between 227 V and 257 V for 4OWLV 80WLV outputs or between 56 8 V and 63 5 V for 40WHV 80WHV outputs Repeat steps a through for each output in your supply Figure 3 8 Transient Recovery Time Test Setup NOMINAL ea quU VOLTAGE i 1 5mv LOADING OUTPUT TRANSIENT Figure 3 9 Transient Response Waveform NOTE AC LINE POWER 3 19 Turn On Off Overshoot This test measures the 5 IS REMOVED FOR THIS TEST amplitude of any transients in the output during turn on or turn off of the supply a Turn off the supply and connect an oscilloscope across the V and V terminals of the output to be tested b Set the oscilloscope to 50 mV div dc coupled 1 sed div and slope c Turn on the supply while observing the oscilloscope The maximum transie
186. he programmed value the DRIVE signal will allow more BASE DRIVE current causing the series regulators to conduct more and raise the output If the output exceeds the programmed value the DRIVE signal will divert current through Q335 and U348 of the base drive circuit and away from the BASE DRIVE power module input causing the series regulators to conduct less thereby reducing the output The voltage control CV circuit and the current control CL circuit is described in paragraphs 2 43 and 2 44 respectively When the output is operating in negative current limit the CL signal controls the base drive circuit via diode CR354 so that the DRIVE signal controls the conduction of the current sink transistors in the power module The negative current limit circuit which generates the CL signal is described in paragraph 2 45 24 3 Voltage Control Circuit When the output is operating in the constant voltage mode this circuit generates the CV control and CV LOOP signals The CV control signal is applied through OR gate diode CR351 to control the base drive circuit in order to regulate the output voltage The CV LOOP signal is sent back to the secondary interface circuit to indicate that the output is in the constant voltage mode of operation The ON OFF signal received from the secondary 503508 M B NO NO 35N 39 5260 ONG 220 E 503908 M B ANO 35M 388 6260 9200 509808 MA ANO CSN SI JEEN 72 BEEN HLIM TI
187. he value displayed on the controller This value should be within the limits specified below using the lo reading noted in step d Readback Accuracy Output Controller Display 40WLV lo 10mA 80WLV lo 20 MA 40WHV lo 4mA 80WHV lo 8 9 the selected outputs voltage to 5 V and the current to the Low Range Full Scale Current value see Table 3 2 by sending the strings VSET lt ch gt 5 ISET lt ch gt 5 2 10 or 4 gt h Multiply the voltage drop across the current monitoring resistor by 10 to convert to amps Record this value lo Note also the current reading on the front pand display The readings should be within the limits specified below for the particular output type being tested Prog Accuracy Display Accuracy Output lo DVM Reading X 10 Front Panel LCD 40WLV 58 mA lo 20 mA 80WLV 10A 116mA 10 35 40WH V 2 23 lo 6 5 mA 80WH V 4A 46mA lo 12 5 i Run the program listed in step e Record the value displayed by the controller This value should be within the limits specified below using the lo reading noted in step h Readback Accuracy Output Controller Display 40WLV lo 15 mA 80WLV lo 30 mA 40WH V lo 6mA 80WHV lo 12 mA j Repeat steps a through i for each output in your supply a Turn off the supply and connect the output to be tested as shown in Figure 3 12 b Set the external power supply to 5V and its current limit to 1 5 times approxima
188. hm current monitoring resistor across the output and a DVM across the resistor see paragraph 3 8 b Turn on the supply and select the output to be tested OUTPUT SELECT key on the front pand Program the output voltage to 5 V and the current to the Minimum Programmable Current value by sending the following strings VSET lt ch gt 5 ISET lt ch gt 0 NOTE An output channel cannot be programmed to 0 amps If the output channel receives a command to go to 0 amps for any positive current below the minimum programmable current it will set itself to the minimum value see Tables 3 2 and 3 3 d Multiply the voltage drop across the current monitoring resistor by 10 to convert to amps and record this value lo Note also the current reading on the output is in negative current limit operation It also checks that the negative current limit has two different values depending upon the output voltage front pand display The readings should be within the limits specified below for the particular output type being tested Prog Accuracy Display Accuracy Output DVM Reading X10 Front Panel LCD 40WLV 80 mA 50 mA 10 15 mA 80WLV 130 mA 100 mA lo 25 mA 40WHV 50 mA 20 mA lo 45 mA 80WHV 70 mA 40 mA lo 85 mA e Read back the output current from the selected channel over the GPIB to the controller by running the following program 10 OUTPUT 705 IOUT lt ch gt 20 ENTER 705 A 30 DISP A 40END f Record t
189. i A13 az ps 20 30 58 Di 3 005 A13 10 Am 36 A11 5 D2 a 21 A14 m 35 aap Dz m 2 A m 07 22 po7 A15 Le A13 03 7 m PCR E A16 o4 X5 1818 5681 SELECTOR 04 b4 R247 ES 1818 5292 as 3 GND Ro Sar D5 ps m NNN REL_1 1 P209 14 0215 2568 32 A15 lo 0 0 7 287K A 1252 9 14 GND og 16 2 1252 1152 We 5 06 R248 0699 3958 lt CONN 74 2 8 16 D7 10 07 20 Ws 3 Q 1820 5944 5 15 K z TO 4 FO ver 287K p r 0699 3958 m 10PIN C 1 14 215 _ Pe as 13 D 0 7 0 15 0281 2 AAN 9 DFI 5 POST ORTEN m e NZ E 2 74ABT573 287K EE HEADER 700 Lb 7AACT32 3 VSS 2 0699 3958 o OR z NY 1821 1256 19 po og 2250 oPr ID 7 Ed 18 Ne 750 7 VDD EVSS Q1 D1 287K A opto PON m 8 Mu 45 22 1 A2 17 2 po 2 0699 3958 R251 9 e D4 Nig S ge i 4 16 og Da 5 o W gt voc MIE 236 15 og 04 65 R252 0699 3958 U208 AS 14 og ps 7 6 NB 1820 5941 1UF 10 13 8 ps a R253 ha 74 38 _ NC 16V X7R 28 06 06 0699 3958 R25 0219 95 9198 o S 8 20 wc CSO 1 A 0 15 s 0160 7736 m 12 9 3 4 NC 81 8 081 9 81 851 A13 14 act u Q7 D7 287K A SR STES DIES OT Seo se 3 13 cz EY 14 0215 11 or 2254 0699 3958 ACTO4 8 85 82 85 02 ja LE E NA 7 z 7 tg g H2 m 552 ZAACTSD 11 gg 1 O
190. ier number or symbol Figure A 10 Miscellaneous Terms and Symbols 6 Agilent Sales and Support Office For more information about Agilent Technologies test and measurement products applications services and for a current sales office listing visit our web site http www agilent com find tmdir You can also contact one of the following centers and ask for a test and measurement sales representative United States Agilent Technologies Test and Measurement Call Center P O Box 4026 Englewood CO 80155 4026 tel 1 800 452 4844 Canada Agilent Technologies Canada Inc 5150 Spectrum Way Mississauga Ontario L4W 5G1 tel 1 877 894 4414 Europe Agilent Technologies Test amp Measurement European Marketing Organisation P O Box 999 1180 AZ Amstelveen The Netherlands tel 31 20 547 9999 Japan Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd Measurement Assistance Center 9 1 Takakura Cho Hachioji Shi Tokyo 192 8510 Japan tel 81 426 56 7832 fax 81 426 56 7840 Technical data is subject to change Latin America Agilent Technologies Latin American Region Headquarters 5200 Blue Lagoon Drive Suite 950 Miami Florida 33126 U S A tel 305 267 4245 fax 305 267 4286 Australia New Zealand Agilent Technologies Australia Pty Ltd 347 Burwood Highway Forest Hill Victoria 3131 tel 1 800 629 485 Australia fax 61 3 9272 0749 tel 0 800 738 378 New Zealand fax 64 4 80
191. imit CC Readback TC 3 15 4 19 4 21 4 22 4 23 4 24 4 25 4 26 4 27 4 28 4 29 4 30 4 33 43A 51 52 Section IV TROUBLESHOOTING INTRODUCTION sese 4 1 ELECTROSTATIC PROTECTION 4 1 REMOVAL AND REPLACEM ENT 4 2 Top Cover Removal 4 2 Gaining Access to Assemblies in the Supply 4 2 GPIB Board Removal 4 2 40 Watt Output Board Removal 4 2 80 Watt Output Board 4 4 Replacing the power M odule U 338 U339 4 4 Front Panel Removal 4 4 Chassis Mounted 4 5 TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED 4 5 FUSE 2 4 5 INITIAL TROUBLESHOOTING AND BOARD ISOLATION PROCEDURES 4 8 Power On Self Test 4 8 Connector P201 Jumper Positions 4 9 ERROR Codes 4 9 GPIB BOARD AND FRONT PANEL TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES 4 13 4 13 Post Repair 4 13 Setting the Model Number MODEL Command 4 13 Signature Analys
192. in the area can be kept from building up a static charge by spraying them with an anti static chemical Agilent Part No 8500 3397 Do not allow long hair to come in contact with static sensitive assemblies 43 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT The major assemblies within the power supply are illustrated in Figure 4 1 The major differences between the models are the quantity and type of output boards they contain the 80 Watt Output boards are about twice the size of the 40 Watt Output boards Figure 4 1 shows the board configuration for each model Component location diagrams and functional schematics for the individual assemblies are given in Section VI Replaceable electrical and mechanical parts for all models are listed in Section V The following paragraphs provide instructions for removing certain assemblies and components for which the procedure may not be obvious upon inspection Replacement procedures are essentially the same as the corresponding removal procedure except that they are performed in the reverse order To avoid the possibility of personal injury remove the power supply from operation before removing the covers Turn off ac power and disconnect the line cord GPIB cable loads and remote sense leads before attempting any repair or replacement M ost of the attaching hardware is metric U se of other types of fasteners will damage threaded inserts When removing or installing screws use a No 1 or a No 2 Pozidriv sc
193. input output pins listed below Circuit Input Output Signature 5 P201 1 7U39 U202 12 60U7 U202 13 183H GPIB U202 14 0600 Talker Listener U202 15 0183 U202 U202 16 0060 Bidirectional Bus U202 17 0018 U202 18 0000 U202 19 0006 4 24 Table 4 11 GPIB Board S A Test No 6 Description This test checks the data path from the Microprocessor through Data Buffers U216 to the output of Data Latches U210 in the Front Panel Interface circuit Test Setup Use the test setup described in paragraph 4 23 Connect jumper pack W202 in the normal operating position and set up the signature analyzer as shown below Signature Analyzer P201 PIN Input i Connection START 11 STOP 12 CLOCK 19 GND 4 Measurements Use the data probe to take signatures for each circuit at the input and output pins listed below Circuit Input Signature Output Signature 5V P201 1 3U9F U216 2 U216 4 SYSTEM U216 6 MICROCOMPUTER U216 8 DATA BUFFERS U216 11 U216 U216 13 U216 15 U216 17 U210 3 U210 2 U210 4 U210 5 FRONT PANEL U210 7 U210 6 INTERFACE U210 8 U210 9 DATA LATCHES U210 13 U210 12 U210 U210 14 U210 15 U210 17 U210 16 U210 18 U210 19 Note The output of U210 to keyboard is not tested during S A 4 25 Table 4 12 GPIB Board S A Test No 7 Description This test checks Data Buffers U214 which send data back to the System Microcomputer from the Front Panel The test is made with no front panel keys depressed Test Set
194. is Testing T 4 14 Test Setup for S A 4 14 Firmware Revisions ROM 2 Command 1 14 OUTPUT BOARD TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES ws 505 niin m entere 4 30 Post Repair Calibration Self Exercise Routine on the Output Board 4 30 Troubleshooting Analog M ultiplexer U323 and Readbadk Using VMUX Command 4 49 Understanding and Troubleshooting the Signal Processor 327 4 50 Power Module Signal 4 54 Miscellaneous Trouble e Symptoms and Remedies sssrin serrr enn DA Section V REPLACEABLE PARTS INTRODUCTION aaa aaa aaa e 5 1 HOW TO ORDER PARTS CONTENTS Cont Section VI AppendixA CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS LOGIC SYMBOLOGY 6 1 INTRODUCTION nennen 6 1 62 FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 6 1 63 6 1 LIST OF FIGURES Figure Page 2 1 Agilent 6621A 6624 and 6627A Multiple Output Power Supplies Block 2 2 2 2 Output Operating Ranges for Agilent Models 6621A 6624A and 6627A 2 3 2 3 GPIB Board Block Diagram eee seis yeaa Seas ven 2 6 2 4 Outpot Board Secondary Interface Circuits Block Diagram aa
195. l l SERVICE MANUAL MULTIPLE OUTPUT LINEAR SYSTEM DC POWER SUPPLIES Agilent MODELS 6621A 6622A 6623A 6624A and 6627A Agilent Part No 5957 6379 Agilent Model 6621A Serial 3737A 03086 through 03145 US37370101 and up Agilent Model 6622A Serial 3736A 04021 through 04040 US37360101 and up Agilent Model 6623A Serial 3736A 05451 through 05530 US37360101 and up Agilent Model 6624A Serial 3735A 13801 through 14200 US37350101 and up Agilent Model 6627A Serial 3735A 02356 through 02510 US37350101 and up For instruments with higher Serial Numbers a change page may be included DR Agilent Technologies Microfiche Part No 5957 6380 Printed in Malaysia September 2001 CERTIFICATION Agilent Technologies certifies that this product met its published specifications at time of shipment from the factory Agilent Technologies further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Bureau of Standards to the extent allowed by the Bureau s calibration facility and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members WARRANTY This Agilent Technologies hardware product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of three years from date of delivery Agilent software and firmware products which are designated by Agilent for use with a hardware product and when properly installed on that hardware product are warranted not to fail t
196. leshooting Flow Chart 4 48 Table 415 Microcomputer U312 Pin Measurements During the Self Exercise Routine Reading Pin No Low common Pulses High VCC 4 MHz sine wave 2 V P P 4 MHZ sine wave 2 V P P High VCC High VCC Pulses Pulses Pulses Pulses Pulses Pulses Pulses Pulses Pulses Pulses Pulses Pulses Pulses Low Low High Pulses Low Pulses Low Shorted to com Low to High Keferenced to 7 Common 4 29 WOON ON Q NN Troubleshooting A nalog M ultiplexer U 323 and Readback Using VM UX Command Analog multiplexer U323 directs one of eight inputs to the readback signal comparator U 324 see paragraph 2 31 The instruction set for the power supply includes the VMUX command which measures the voltage at these inputs This command can be used to troubleshoot the analog multiplexer and the readback circuitry on the output board The supply may have to be put into the SKIP SELF TEST mode in order to program the output see paragraph 4 126 The syntax for the VM UX command is as follows VMUX lt ch gt lt input no gt U323 Pin No 1 4 Common Fuse Signal Signal Magnitude Approx V READBACK Output Voltage CURRENT READBACK Output I Sink CURRENT READBACK Output I Source CV REF Programmed Voltage CL REF Programmed Current OV REF Programmed OVERVOLTAGE 4 49 A complete description of the syntax
197. longer rise time is used the transient response recovery time may appear to be out of specification 3 18 Transient Recovery Time This test measures the time for the output voltage to recover to within the specified value following a change from a low current value to the Low RangeFull Scale Current value h Adjust the oscilloscope trigger level for a stationary waveform as shown in Figure 3 9 and check that the loading transient is within 75 mV of its final value in less than 75 us Change the oscilloscope settings to slope and repeat a Turn off the supply and connec the output to be tested steps g and h for the unloading transient see Figure 3 as shown in Figure 3 8 9 b Turn on the supply and select the output to be tested j Repeat steps a through i for each output in your supply OUTPUT SELECT key on the front pane 3 8 100 mV Repeat test by observing the scope after turning off the supply SE d Repeat the test steps a through for each output in your supply 3 20 Overvoltage Protection The following tests check the operation and accuracy of the fixed OV programmable OV and the external OV protection circuits Fixed OV Test This test verifies that the fixed OV circuit will Se d d be activated when the output is about 20 above the High Range Full Scale Voltage value R1 15 OR LORD a Turn off the supply and connec an external power supply to the output to be tested as shown in Fi
198. ly and connect the ac power line through a variable voltage transformer Connect the output to be tested as shown in Figure 3 3 with the DVM connected between the 5 and 5 terminals the Load switch closed and the Short switch opened Adjust the transformer to 13 below the nominal line voltage d Turn on the supply and select the output to be tested OUTPUT SELECT key on the front pand Program the current of the selected output to the High Range Maximum Programmable Current value and the output voltage to the High Range Full Scale Voltage value see Table 3 3 by sending the following strings ISET lt ch gt lt 2 06 0 824 or 4 12 gt VSET ch gt 200r 50 gt Adjust the load for the High Range Full Scale Current value see Table 3 3 as indicated on the front panel display The CV annunciator on the front pand must be on If itis not adjust the load down slightly g Record the output voltage reading on the DVM h Adjust the transformer to 6 above the nominal line voltage Record the output voltage reading on the DVM The difference between the DVM readings in steps g and i is the source effect voltage and should not exceed 3 mV 40WLV and 80WLV outputs or 6 mV 40WHV and 80WHV outputs Repeat steps b through i for each output in your supply Be sure to turn off supply before performing step b TO r DIGITRL VOLTMETER TO OSCILLOSCOPE HOR RMS VOLTMETER RESISTOR
199. mp BIAS 28480 W13 6621 5060 3273 XFMR POWER 7V 5A 28480 6622 5060 3274 XFMR POWER 20V 2A 28480 6623 5060 3270 XFMR POWER 7V 5A amp BIAS 28480 6624 27 5060 3268 XFMR POWER 20V 2A 28480 W14 6621 5060 3270 XFMR POWER 7V 5A amp BIAS 28480 6622 5060 3275 XFMR POWER 20V 2A amp BIAS 28480 6623 5060 3268 XFMR POWER 20V 2A 28480 6624 27 5060 3269 XFMR BIAS 28480 W15 6621 22 NOT USED 6623 5060 3269 XFMR BIAS 28480 6624 27 5060 3266 XFMR POWER 20V 2A amp BIAS 28480 W16 06624 80011 FRONT PANEL HARNESS 28480 5040 1653 0361 1218 0380 0644 0380 1860 0515 0885 0515 0886 Chassis Mechanical WASHER HLDR REF XFMR RIVET REF CHAS STDF STUD MTG REF GPIB STDF REF CHAS amp CHAS TOP SCR MACH M4X0 7 REF BAR BLK REF XFMR GROUND SCR MACH M3X0 5 REF BOARD GROUND REF GPIB Table 5 5 Agilent 6621A 6624A Multiple Output Power Supplies Parts List continued Desig Agilent Part Description Mfg Mfg No Code Part No Chassis Mechanical 0515 0890 SCR MACH M3X0 5 REF CHAS TOP 0515 0923 SCR MACH M4X0 7 REF XFMR 0515 0906 SCR MACH M4X0 7 REF H SINK 0515 0910 SCR MACH M4X0 7 REF MOD HS 0515 0920 SCR MACH M3X0 5 REF FAN CHAS 0515 0923 SCR MACH M4X0 7 REF XFMR CHAS MT 0515 0981 SCR MACH M4X0 7 REF U335 0515 1132 SCR MACH 5 0 8 REF HANDLE MTG 0535 0031 NUT HEX W LKWR REF FAN TO CHASS GNDSTD 0535 0082 NUT HEX REF FTPNL GNDSTD 0590 1381 THREADED INSERT REF CHAS TOP 0590 1088 T
200. mponent location diagrams for the power supply 6 2 FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS The power supply circuits are shown on Figure 6 1 through 6 5 The schematics consists of one or more foldout sheets that illustrate the circuits functionally Figure 6 1 shows the ac power input and distribution for all five models 6621A 6624A and 6627A Power transformer connections and cable assembly part numbers for each model are included on pages 6 2 and 6 3 Figure 6 2 illustrates the circuits on the GPIB board This board is identical in all five models 6621A 6624A and 6627 Figure 6 3 6 4 and 6 5 illustrate the circuits on the 40 Watt Low Voltage 40WLV 40 Watt High Voltage 40 80 Watt Low Voltage 80WLV and 80 Watt High Voltage 80WHV Output board types The output board configuration for each model is as follows Output 4 40WHV 40WHV 40WHV 40WHV 40WHV 6 1 Figure 6 3 Sheets 1 through 4 show the following circuits and cover all 40W output board types Differences between the types are indicated on the schematic Sheet 1 Secondary interface circuits Sheet 2 Bias Turn on and Overvoltage circuits Sheet 3 Control circuit FET downprogrammer Bleed and Sense Protect circuits Sheet 4 Power Mesh circuits Figure 6 4 Sheets 1 through 4 are similar to Figure 6 3 and cover all 40W output board types Differences between the types are indicated on the schematic Figure 6 5 Sheets 1 through 4 are
201. mputer 312 or a short on the data lines between these two IC s Note however that certain load transients can cause a temporary multiple status condition to exist and this is not to be considered a problem A status decoding table which indicates the logic relationship between the five status input lines and the six status output lines is induded in Figure 4 19 To troubleshoot status problem set up an osdlloscope as P O U32 OVERVOLTAGE CIRCUIT 6 OV DRIVE OV COMP POV DISABLE OV TRIP OV DRIVE rv er HGH GEV LOW LOW LOW LOW Figure 4 17 Signal Processor U327 Overvoltage Circuit Simplified Schematic Diagram Figure 4 18 Signal Processor U327 Power On Start Up Circuit Simplified Schematic Diagram 4 53 described below and refer to Figure 419 and the troubleshooting procedures of Figure 4 20 Connect oscilloscope Channel A at 2 volts div to STATUSSELECT U327 pin 11 b Trigger on Channel A negative slope Set time base to 10uS div c The STATUS SELECT line should go low for about 30uS During this interval each of the six TTL compatible status output lines from U327 can be checked against the information given in the table on Figure 4 19 by connecting Channel of the oscilloscope to the IC pin in question d The five status input lines to U327 can also be checked with the scope The input lines should be relatively clean dc waveforms unless there are load transients occurring The input
202. n front panel c Program the current of the selected output to the Low Range M aximum Programmable Current value and the output voltage to the Low Range Full Scale value see Table 3 2 d Adjust the load for slightly less than Low Range Full Scale Current as read on the display Check that the CV annunciator is on 3 13 e Adjust the transformer to 13 below the nominal line voltage f Wait 30 minutes for the output to stabilize under these initial conditions and then record the output voltage value g Adjust the transformer to 6 above the nominal line voltage h Wait 30 minutes and record the output voltage value again The difference in the readings taken in steps f and h should be less than 5 0 mV for 40WLV 80WLV outputs and 10 4 mV for 40WHV 80WHV outputs Open the load switch and immediately record the output voltage reading j Wait 30 minutes and record the output voltage reading The difference in the readings taken in steps i and j should be less than 5 0 mV for 40WLV 80WLV outputs and 10 4 mV for 40WHV outputs k Repeat steps a through j for each output in your supply 3 32 Short Term Current Drift Test This test measures the change in output current within the first 30 minutes of a change in the line voltage or the load Place the supply to be tested in a temperature chamber or in a temperature controlled environment such as a standards room a Turn off the supply and connect the output to b
203. n s 5 and common Check for an open FET Q339 Check if board is in the self exercise mode see paragraph 4 28 CV load effect Check that the sense leads are connected properly Regulation can be affected by load lead drop when remote sensing See paragraph 4 11 in the Operating Manual Check U352 and C404 U347 and C399 Check for oscillations on the output see remedy for the trouble symptom above CC load effect Check for over 30 mV on R405 to confirm a leaky transistor P O U340B Check for leaky C390 C391 C393 Line regulation Check regulation of bias supply 3 pin regulators as a function of line voltage Check the stability of the 10 V reference voltages Readback Error Check if the output has been properly calibrated Check U319 U345 U323 See paragraph 4 28 If current readback as well as current accuracy are incorrect by approximately the same percentage check sense resistor R408 Check for proper operation of FET Q339 and transistor P O U348A Check for slow turn on of Q319 as controlled by C371 Check for leaky current sources U336 U340D on 40 W boards Q326 Q329 and U340D on 80 W boards by shorting U327 23 delay cap to common to turn off Q319 and P O U341A The voltage on each of R379 R381 should be less than 2 millivolts Overshoot or overvoltage at turn on output may apparently work properly after turn on OV fires when output is loaded or during loading
204. n the controller This value should be within the DVM reading noted in step d and the limits specified below Readback A ccuracy Output Controller Display 40WLV 80WLV DVM 20 mV 40WHV 80WHV DVM 50 9 Program the selected output s voltage to the High Range Full Scale value 20 V for 40WLV 80WLV or 50V for 40WH V 80W HV outputs by sending the following string VSET lt ch gt lt 20 50 gt h Record the output voltage readings on the DVM and the front panel display The readings should be within the limits specified below for the particular output type tested Prog Accuracy Display Accuracy Output DVM Reading Front Panel LCD 40WLV 80WLV 20V 31mV DVM 35 mV 40WHV 80WHV 50V x80mV DVM 80 mV i Run the program listed in step e Record the value displayed by the controller This value should be within the limits specified below Readback Accuracy Output Controller Display 40WLV 80WLV DVM 280 mV 40WHV 80WHV DVM 275 mV j Repeat steps a through i for each output present in your supply Table 3 2 Low Range Voltage and Current Values Output Full Scale Max Prog Full Scale Max Prog Min Prog Board Voltage Voltage Current Current Current An output channel cannot be programmed to 0 amps If the output channel receives a command to go to 0 amps or any positive current below the minimum programmable value it will set itself to the minimum programmable value 3 13 CV Load Effect This test
205. nal Processor U 327 Signal 1 nennen nennen nnne nenne nenne nennen nene 4 51 4 17 Typical Power Module Voltage nemen nennen nene ne hne nens 4 54 4 18 Miscellaneous Trouble 5 ee tenen renes nnne 4 55 51 Output Board Configurations e cent It de chen OE AO 5 1 5 2 ReferenceDeslgnators cade Sue detec mm ket add 5 1 5 3 ADBGrEVIAUO S zzz Dee end 5 2 5 4 Federal Manufacturer 5 nenne nennen 5 3 5 5 Model 6621 6624A and 6627A Multiple Output Power Parts List aaa 54 5 6 GPIB Board Parts Uist c oe p EIE Ge E E KE UR TER E VER xd NA 5 8 5 7 Output Board Parts ist u eene eha ge read ei de e dd 5 10 Section INTRODUCTION 1 1 SCOPE This manual contains principles of operation verification and troubleshooting information for the power supply Replaceable parts lists and circuit diagrams are also provided Installation operation programming and calibration procedures as well as detailed specifications are given in a separate Operating Manual Agilent Part No 5957 6377 Wherever applicable the service instructions given in this manual refer to pertinent information provided in the Op
206. ne of the letters isA If two affecting inputs have the same letter and the same identifying number they stand in an OR relationship to each other If the labels denoting the functions of affecting inputs or outputs must be numbers eg outputs of a coder the identifying numbers to be assodated with both affecting inputs and affected input or outputs shall be replaced by another character selected to avoid ambiguity eg Greek letters An affecting input affects only the corresponding affected inputs and outputs of the symbol Note that dependency notation is usually indicated by numbers The numbers themselves have no value they simply relate two or more points having the same number However sometimes an input or output has a weighted value eg 1 2 4 8 in these cases a non numeric symbol e g may be used to avoid confusion between a weighted value and the dependency notation Eleven types of dependencies are listed below A Address Identifies the address inputs of a memory C Control Identifies an input such as a timing or dock input that produces action and indicates which other inputs are controlled by it Used for sequential elements flip flops registers and may imply morethan a simple AND relationship EN Enable Identifies an input that enables outputs and Miscellaneous Terms and Symbols Figure A 10 shows indicates which outputs are affected by it Acts as a miscellaneous terms and symbols that a
207. ned by address lines A0 A2 which are received from the microcomputer The analog inputs to the multiplexer indicate the following COM hardwired to common to reduce noise when no signals are being sampled FUSE output board s return fuse status read back during power on self test V READBACK output voltage READBACK output current sink H READBACK output current source CV REF voltage DAC output CL REF current DAC output OV REF overvoltage DAC output The voltage readback buffer U319C provides unity gain for the V READBACK signal and isolates the multiplexes circuit from the CV control circuit see Figure 2 5 The current readback amplifier U345 provides a gain of approximately 36 for the signal 0 to 0 25 V approximately which comes from the current sense resistor see Figure 2 5 The amplified signal is an input IMON to the analog multiplexes and to the current readback inverter P O U319D The inverter slightly attenuates the signal and provides the correct polarity to the analog multiplexes so that the current can be monitored IMON when the output is sinking current current 2 31 Readback DAC and Signal Comparator The readback DAC U 321 amplifier 03150 readback signal comparator U324 and analog multiplexes U323 along with the microcomputer U312 form an analog to digital converter ADC which monitors the output board signals sent to the analog multiplexes The r
208. nel with the hardware error is selected to be displayed Error codes 11 through 14 refer to a specific output where an error has oc curred If all output channels have this error the problem is probably on the GPIB board If only a particular output channel has the error follow the board isolation procedures in Figure 4 6 to isolate the problem to the defective output board the GPIB board or the cable between the specified output board and the GPIB board Same as error code 11 Same as error code 11 Same as error code 11 The supply s model number cannot be found The GPIB board may be defective see paragraph 4 18 or the supply s model number may require reprogramming using the MODEL command see paragraph 4 21 Supply requires recalibration An unexplained EEPROM error has occur red Recalibrate as described in Appendix A of the Operating Manual If recalibration doesn t fix the problem troubleshoot the GPIB board see paragraph 4 18 Jumper W201 on the GPIB board is in the SKIP SELF TEST position of con nector P201 see Figure 4 2 Install W201 in the NORM RUN position and carry out self test if desired An error has occurred during calibration This may result if out of range numbers are sent If recalibration see Appendix A in Operating Manual doesn t fix the problem there may be a hardware problem see GPIB troubleshooting paragraph 4 18 4 12 Table 4 5 ERROR Codes and Messages continued CA
209. ng Manual The supply s Model number is set as described in the next paragraph 4 21 Setting the Model Number At turn on the supply s model number and letter suffix e g Agilent 6624A are read out of the EEPROM along with other constants which are required to program the supply correctly The model number constant specifies how many and what type of outputs eg 40 W or 80 W etc your supply contains and thus establishes the programming limits for a particular supply The MODEL command is used to set the model number and letter suffix of the supply This was done before your supply left the factory However when you replace a defective GPIB board or repair an GPIB board by changing its EEPROM chip U211 this setting may be lost and you must set the model number using the MODEL command To assign a model number to your supply the following short program can be used with BASIC installed in an GPIB controller Note that in this programming example it is assumed that the GPIB Interface address is 7 and the supply s GPIB address is 05 and your supply is a Agilent Model 6624A The MODEL command removes all calibration constants and substitutes default values Consequently after theM OD EL command is sent you must recalibrate each output 10 OUTPUT 705 CMODE 1 20 OUTPUT 705 M ODEL 6624A 30 OUTPUT 705 CMODE O 40 OUTPUY 705 CLR 50 END After sending the above program wait at least 3 seconds for the su
210. nn nennen nens 3 9 3 9 Transient Response Waveform ne nene nenne nnns 3 9 3 10 Fixed OV Protection Tea ee REB inad A ia 3 9 3 11 OV External Trip Test Connections rn Lote ERE RR a 3 10 3 12 Negative Current Limit CC Readback aaa aa aaa aaa aaa aaa pak aaa rn nenne nnne nnn nenne nnn 3 12 4 1 Agilent 6621A 6624A and 6627A Multiple Output Supplies Assembly Locations emm 4 3 4 2 GPIB Board Fuse and Test Point Locations 2 ttre SES ESPES re e e rre 4 7 4 3 40WLV Output Board Fuse and Test Point Locations mme enhn ren rne nnn nennen nene 4 8 4 4 40WHV Output Board Fuse end Test Point aaa mene nennen nene nennen nennen nnne 4 10 4 5 80WLV 80WHV Output Boards Fuse and Test Point Locations mener 4 11 4 6 Initial Troubleshooting and Board Isolation nennen mene nenne hene hen nennen nn rne nennen 4 15 4 7 GPIB Board and Front Panel Troubleshooting eee hene hee e he 4 17 4 8 Signature Analysis Test 4 19 4 9 Output Board Troubleshooting uu RR keen a Coda oec da 4 31 4 10 Low Voltage Output Board Waveforms During Self Exercise
211. nt Part Description Mfg Mfg No Code Part No U315 1826 1553 IC OPAMP LO BIAS H IMP 28480 U316 317 NOT USED U318 1826 1369 IC VLT REG 28480 U319 1826 0315 IC OPAMP GP QUAD 14 DIP 27014 U320 1820 1216 IC SN74LS138N 28480 U321 1826 1488 IC DAC 28480 U322 NOT USED U323 1826 1021 IC ANLG MUXR 28480 U324 1826 1475 IC VOLTAGE COMPARATOR 28480 U325 1826 0412 IC COMPARATOR PRCN DUAL 27014 LM393N U326 1810 0639 NETWORK RES DIP 14 20K X 13 28480 U327 1826 1842 IC SEMI CUSTOM 28480 U328 U333 NOT USED U334 40WLV 40WHV 1906 0349 DIO FW BRDG 600V 35A 28480 80WLV 80WHV 1906 0348 U335 40WLV 80WLV 1906 0348 80WHV 04713 7091 40WHV 1906 0349 DIO FW BRDG 600V 35A U336 40WLV 40WHV 1858 0088 IC XSTR ARRAY 14 DIP 80WLV 80WHV NOT USED U337 1826 1843 U338 5060 3567 IC PWR HYBRID 28480 U339 40WLV 40WHV USED 80WLV 80WHV 5060 3567 IC PWR HYBRID MATCHED W U 338 28480 U340 1858 0127 U341 1858 0107 U342 344 NOT USED U345 347 1826 0493 IC OPAMP LO BIAS H IMP 27014 LM308AN U348 1826 0083 IC OP AMP 28480 U349 NOT USED U350 1826 0493 IC OPAMP LO BIAS H IMP 27014 LM308AN U351 1826 0412 IC COMPARATOR PRCN DUAL 27014 LM393N U352 1826 1409 IC OPAMP LO BIAS H IMP 27014 LM308AN U353 354 NOT USED U355 1826 1255 IC V RGLTR OV V SEN 8 DIP 28480 MC3423P1 VR300 304 NOT USED VR305 1902 1377 DIO ZNR 6 19V 2 PD 4mW 28480 VR306 1902 0182 DIO ZNR 20 5V 5 PD 4mW 28480 VR307 314 NOT USED VR315 1902 0057 DIO ZNR 6 49V 5 PD 4mW 28480 VR316 40WLV
212. nt amplitude should not exceed Figure 3 10 Fixed OV Protection Test Setup 3 9 Programmable OV Accuracy Test This test checks the overvoltage OV programming accuracy Taking the OV programming accuracy and the voltage programming accuracy into account the upper and lower limits of the OV firing range for each output type are as follows Output LowerVSET Nominal Upper VSET for no OV OV Setting tofireOV 40WLV 80WLV 18 74 V 19 0V 19 26 V 40WH V 80WH V 48 38 V 49 0V 49 62 V a Turn off the supply and disconnect all loads and test equipment b Turn on the supply and select the output to be tested OUTPUT SELECT key on thefront pand c Program the OV to 1V below the High Range Full Scale Voltage value 19 V 40WLV 80WLV outputs or 49 V 40WH V 80WHV outputs Send the following string OVSET a gt lt 19 49 gt d Program the output voltage to the Lower VSET Limit specified above by sending the following string VSET lt ch gt lt 18 74 48 38 gt e Note that the overvoltage should not trip and the front panel should display the programmed output voltage and no current f Program the output voltage to the Upper VSET limit specified above by sending the following string VSET lt ch gt lt 19 26 or 49 62 gt g Note that the overvoltage has tripped as indicated by the display showing OVERVOLTAGE h Reset the output by setting the OV to the maximum value 23 V for 40WLV 80WLV or 55V for 40WH
213. nter Produces one output pulse each time it receives a specific number of input pulses BIN OCT HPRI BIN 1 RAM Multiplexer The output is dependent only on the selected input Demultiplexer Only the selected output is a function of the input Register Array of unconnected flip flops that form a simple register or latch Shift Register Register in which data can be shifted from one stage to the next the asterisk indicates the number of stages Comparator The active output indicates which of two or more sets of inputs is of greatest magnitude Monstable One Shot Muitivibrator Output becomes active when the input becomes active Output remains active even if the input becomes inactive for a period of time that is characteristic of the device and or circuit Binary to Octal Decoder Converts a three line binary code to eight line octal code High Priority to Binary Encoder Encodes the address of the highest active of eight inputs to three line binary code Digital to Analog Converter Output current is a linear product of a digital word Random Access Memory Addressable memory with read in and read out capability Read Only Memory Addressable memory with read out capability only Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Similar to a ROM in normal use but can be erased and programmed with special equipment Figure A 2 Qualifiers and Functional Labels Implied Indicator
214. nts with power cable connected Under certain conditions dangerous voltages may exist even with the power cable removed To avoid injuries always disconnect power discharge circuits and remove external voltage sources before touching components DO NOT SERVICE OR ADJUST ALONE Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present DO NOT EXCEED INPUT RATINGS This instrument may be equipped with a line filter to reduce electromagnetic interference and must be connected to a properly grounded receptacle to minimize electric shock hazard Operation at line voltages or frequencies in excess of those stated on the data plate may cause leakage currents in excess of 5 0 mA peak SAFETY SYMBOLS Instruction manual symbol the product will be marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the ZA instruction manual refer to Table of Contents x Indicates hazardous voltages Indicate earth ground terminal The WARNING sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure practice or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in personal injury Do not proceed beyond a WARNING sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met The CAUTION sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to an operating procedure or the like which if not correctly CAUTION performed or adhered to could result in damage t
215. o 63 5 V Programmable 49 V 48 38 to 49 62 V 18 74 to 19 26 V External OV Check if OK Check if OK CC PROGRAMMING 0 Amps Output Accuracy Io Display Accuracy Readback Accuracy CC PROGRAMMING FULL SCALE Output Accuracy Io 2 23 Display Accuracy Io 6 5 mA 50 mA 20 lo 45 mA lo 4 4 46 Io 12 5 Readback Accuracy Io 12 mA 3 24 CC Low Range Limit Is 2 15 to 2 35 A 4 3 to 4 7 A Display Accuracy Is 13 5 mA Is 30 mA Readback Accuracy Is 13 mA Is 29 5 mA High Range Limit 0 9 to 1 02 A 2 1to2 5A CC SOURCE EFECT 3 17 Section IV TROUBLESHOOTING Most of the maintenance procedures given in this section are performed with power applied and protective covers removed Such maintenance should be performed only by servicetrained personnd who are aware of the hazards involved for example fire and electrical shock 4 1 INTRODUCTION This section provides troubleshooting and repair information for the power supply The troubleshooting technique is to first isolate the problem to an assembly and then follow the troubleshooting procedure provided for the faulty assembly The assembly GPIB board or output board troubleshooting procedures will isolate the problem to the defective component or circuit on the board Before attempting to troubleshoot the supply ensure that
216. o execute their programming instructions due to defects in material and workmanship for a period of 90 days from date of delivery During the warranty period Agilent Technologies will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective Agilent does not warrant that the operation for the software firmware or hardware shall be uninterrupted or error free For warranty service with the exception of warranty options this product must be returned to a service facility designated by Agilent Customer shall prepay shipping charges by and shall pay all duty and taxes for products returned to Agilent for warranty service Except for products returned to Customer from another country Agilent shall pay for return of products to Customer Warranty services outside the country of initial purchase are included in Agilent s product price only if Customer pays Agilent international prices defined as destination local currency price or U S or Geneva Export price If Agilent is unable within a reasonable time to repair or replace any product to condition as warranted the Customer shall be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon return of the product to Agilent LIMITATION OF WARRANTY The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by the Customer Customer supplied software or interfacing unauthorized modification or misuse operation outside of the environmental spe
217. o or destruction of part or all of the product Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met DO NOT SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR MODIFY INSTRUMENT Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification to the instrument Return the instrument to an Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained Instruments which appear damaged or defective should be made inoperative and secured against unintended operation until they can be repaired by qualified service personnel SAFETY SUMMARY continued GENERAL Any LEDs used in this product are Class 1 LEDs as per IEC 825 1 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS This instrument is intended for indoor use in an installation category II pollution degree 2 environment It is designed to operate at a maximum relative humidity of 95 and at altitudes of up to 2000 meters Refer to the specifications tables for the ac mains voltage requirements and ambient operating temperature range SAFETY SYMBOL DEFINITIONS Symbol Description Symbol Description Direct current Terminal for Line conductor on permanently E installed equipment Alternating current Caution risk of electric shock Three phase alternating current Caution refer to accompanying documents Earth ground terminal In position of a
218. o regulate the output is drawn away by the control drcuit through the DRIVE input via Q335 A level of current through Q335 that exceeds the BASE DRIVE current can turn on the power module current sink transistors to sink output current up to the negative current limit value SCR Overvoltage Circuit The power module has an internal SCR whose gate input is capacitively coupled to the OV GATE pin The OV GATE signal can fire the SCR for a number of reasons which are descibed later under the Overvoltage Protection Circuit paragraph In addition to shorting the output the fired SCR will cause the OV SENSE signal to go low signaling the microcomputer to program the output to zero The output will remain shorted and programmed to zero until the circuit is reset The SCR drcuit is reset when the POV DISABLE signal OVRST command is received by the OV reset circuit Q320 The condition that caused the overvoltage must be removed in order for the circuit to remain reset If the condition is not removed the OV GATE signal will again fire the SCR and disable the output Note that in addition to resetting the SCR the OVRST command will program the output to the settings that existed before the OV occurred Down Programmer Separate transistors in the power module are used to sink output current and are capable of rapidly downprogramming the output voltage to about 2 V An external FET down programmer circuit see paragraph 2 46 is connected
219. onnection START STOP CLOCK GND Measurements Use the data probe to take signatures for each circuit at the output pins listed below These signatures apply to the firmware revsions listed Refer to Appendix A for previous versions Date code gt 2629 2839 Revision gt A 00 02 A 00 03 Circuit Output Signatures 5 P201 1 0001 0001 U206 11 AH2C UF2F U206 12 13CC 9650 U206 13 PUCC 4134 ROM U206 U206 15 C2A3 164A Data Bus Lines U206 16 HU49 3449 U206 17 PF79 A11F U206 18 3856 H930 U206 19 AHU7 A791 U217 2 H694 UP17 U217 5 09HF 4C29 System Microcomputer U217 6 77HF A09C Data Latches U217 9 H950 8C24 U217 U217 12 6UA5 9A25 U217 15 U63H 508U U217 16 1F2A 6F99 U217 19 H6UA 53F9 4 21 Table 4 8 GPIB Board S A Test No 3 Description This test checks the data path from the Microprocessor through the Data Buffers U216 and to the output of Data Latches U213 in the Output Boards Interface Circuit Test Setup Use the test setup described in paragraph 4 23 Connect jumper pack W202 in the normal operating position and set up the signature analyzer as shown below Signature Analyzer P201 PIN Input Connection START 11 STOP 12 CLOCK 16 GND 4 Measurements Use the data probe to take signatures for each circuit at the input and output pins listed below Circuit Input Signature Output Signature 5V P201 1 3U9F U216 2 U216 4 SYSTEM U216 6 DATA BUFFERS U216 8 U216 U216 11 Data Bus Lines U216
220. oprocessor also uses the 4 millisecond clock to determine when to refresh the front panel display and to perform other regularly scheduled jobs The R W read write output from the microprocessor indicates the direction of flow on the data bus either to or from the microprocessor A low level R W signal indicates that the microprocessor is writing data onto the data bus A high level R W signal indicates that the microprocessor is reading data that was placed on the bus by the addressed circuit The microprocessor uses the address decoder circuit and the address bus to specify the data transfer locations Addresses are valid on the rising edge of the Q signal 2 11 Data Bus Latches U217 and Buffers U216 The timing sequence of the microprocessor is such that the circuits providing data for the microprocessor are de selected address disappears before the microprocessor can read the data The data bus latches U217 latch the data to be read by the microprocessor The data is updated on every falling Q pulse Data put on the data bus by the microprocessor goes around the latches through buffers U216 2 12 Free Run and Signature Analysis Jumpers The data bus is connected to the microprocessor through a jumper pack W202 For some signature analysis tests of the microprocessor kernel microprocessor RAM ROM the data bus is broken by moving W202 from the NORMAL position to the NOP position see paragraph 4 23 This connects
221. or circuit to generate OV GATE through CR357 and shut down the supply 50 508 3S3HL N3dO SI EASY GNU O383dMN SI 91EMA SQI4408 ATM 8 ONY AMO LON 6172 FASO AO 310 33 181 078 3 OOH OL 3140 11231083 3581 OAAJAO AO 310323 Figure 2 9 Overvoltage Protection Circuits Simplified Schematic 2 18 Section III VERIFICATION 3 1 INTRODUCTION This section contains test procedures that check the operation of the power supply Four types of procedures are provided Operation Verification Tests Performance Tests Extended Tests and Temperature Coefficient Tests The Operation Verification Tests comprise a short procedure to verify that the supply is performing properly without testing all specified parameters The Performance Tests provide a more complete test of the supply by testing most of the specifications listed in Table 1 1 in the Operating Manual Agilent Part No 5957 6377 The Extended and Temperature Coefficient tests are similar to the Performance tests except that they are conducted ina controlled environment and require a longer period of time to complete each test If failures are encountered or out of specification test results are observed refer to the Troubleshooting Procedures in Section IV in this manual The troubleshooting procedures will determine if repair and or calibration is required Calibration procedures are provided in
222. or unloading transients Check that the OV setting is accurate properly calibrated Check that the OV setting is not too close to the sum of the sense lead voltage plus the load lead drop Note that the overvoltage circuit senses the output voltage at the and V output terminals not at the sense leads Check for open C433 C434 in the sense protect circuit Check for open C429 C359 C352 Check for excessive load lead voltage drop see paragraph 4 5 in the Operating Manual See Poor Transient Response symptom in this table OV will not reset Check output with an oscilloscope The overvoltage circuit may be resetting and then tripping again Check FET Q320 Check U312 pin 23 waveform when attempting reset This line should go high for about 1 5 mS If it does not check U312 Check Check U327 Programming speed will be affected by external output capacitors see paragraph 4 13 in the Operating Manual If problem occurs with no external output capacitor check the voltage programming time constant capacitor C402 in the P O U352B CV DAC buffer circuit Check CR347 in the CC loop When not in the CC mode check that U346 6 is approximately 14 volts so that the CC loop will not interfere with up programming Check C393 Output voltage programming speed out of specification 4 55 Table 4 18 Miscellaneous Trouble Symptoms continued Trouble Symptom Output resets to zero volts Check operation of the medi
223. outputs CVO CLO CLO OV OT and UNREG are returned to the microcomputer via data bus lines DO D5 when chip select CSO is decoded Overvoltage Detector This circuit generates the OV DRIVE signal which shorts the output by firing the SCR crowbar within the power module on the output if any of the following conditions are present 1 The output at the V terminal exceeds the programmed OV trip point OV REF Note that the H READBACK signal provides an offset to compensate for the voltage drop across the current monitor resistor The POV DISABLE signal inhibits the programmable OV function from affecting the OV DRIVE signal 2 The voltage from the V output terminal to the S terminal or from the S terminal to the V output terminal exceeds 1 5 V applies to remote sensing only 3 A trip signal is received on the output s OV terminals 4 The output s fixed overvoltage circuit is activated Power On Start U At power on the output of the turn on comparator circuit BIAS TRIP input signal to U327 is initially low which holds the PCLR and ON OFF signals low With PCLR low the microcomputer is held in the reset state With ON OFF low the power control circuits are held off preventing any power from reaching the output terminals The turn on comparator circuit part of U325 monitors the unregulated bias supply to determine if it is high enough to guarantee regulation by the threepin regulators The medi
224. pply s compliance with the specifications listed in Table 1 1 of the Operating manual The procedures cover Agilent Models 6621A through 6624A and 6627A in the series of Multiple Output Power Supplies The performance test procedures must be performed on each output Figure 3 1 shows the outputs present and output ranges on each model The test procedures that follow give settings and results for each type of output that may be tested There are four types of outputs 40 Watt Low Voltage 40WLV 40 Watt High Voltage 40WHV 80 Watt Low Voltage 80WLV and 80 Watt High Voltage 8OWHV Make sure that you use the test settings and results listed for the particular output bei ng tested It is recommended that the tests be performed in the sequence given and that all data be recorded on the test record provided at the end of the test procedures see paragraph 3 28 3 6 Measurement Techniques 3 7 Setup for Tests Measure the dc output voltage directly at the 5 and S terminals of the output under test Connect the output for local sensing and use adequate wire gauge for load leads as described in Sedion IV of the Operating M anual Many of the test procedures require the use of a variable load resistor capable of dissipating the required power see Table 3 1 Using a variable load resistor requires that switches be used to connect disconnect and short the load resistor An electronic load if available can be used in place of a v
225. pply to complete initialization Next cyde the ac power to initiate a power on self test and initialize the supply then perform the calibration procedures outlined in Appendix A of the Operating Manual 4 22 Signature Analysis Testing The easiest and most efficient method of troubleshooting microprocessor based instruments is signature analysis which is similar to signal tracing with an oscilloscope in linear circuits Part of the microcomputer memory is dedicated to signature analysis and a known bit stream is generated to stimulate as many nodes as possible within the circuit However because it is virtually impossible to analyze a bit stream with an oscilloscope a signature analyzer is used to compress the bit stream into a four character signature By comparing signatures of the IC under test to the correct signatures for each node faults can usually be isolated to one or two components Signature Analysis S A Tests 1 through 8 Tables 46 through 4 13 respectively test most of the circuits on the GPIB board as well as the keypad and display circuit boards on the front panel The tests should be performed in sequence i e Test No 1 No 2 etc Note that the signatures taken for the ROM S A Test No 2 Table 4 7 apply only to firmware revision _02 date 2629 see paragraph 4 24 The general test setup for S A tests is given in paragraph 4 23 The following general notes apply to signature analysis of the GPIB board
226. pressed key is given in Table 4 14 Figure 6 2 shows the keypad schematically SIGNATURES U214 OUTPUT PINS U214 INPUT PINS 5 7 13 15 ERR STO RCL DLY METER UN MASK FAULT OV RST OV SET OCP OC RST OUTPUT SELECT 4 OUTPUT SELECT VSET 4 27 Table 4 13 GPIB Board S A Test No 8 cont SIGNATURES U214 OUTPUT PINS U214 INPUT PINS 5 7 11 13 15 ISET OUTPUT ON OFF 0 O Q N gt 4 28 Table 4 14 Keypad Signal Paths See Figure 6 2 Pressed Scan Lines Keyboard Readback Lines Key from Decoder connector pins to Data Buffer U211 pin U214 pin 9 2 and 14 8 8 and 14 7 6 and 14 OUTPUT SELECT gt 9 and 14 lt OUTPUT SELECT 10 and 14 OVSET 11 and 14 METER 12 and 14 6 2 and 7 5 8 and 7 4 6 and 7 9 and 7 10 and 7 DLY 11 and 7 12 and 7 13 and 7 2 and 5 3 8 and 5 2 6 and 5 1 9 and 5 10 and 5 OCP 11 and 5 12 and 5 ERR 13 and 5 2 and 3 and 3 8 0 6 and 3 OUTPUT ON OFF 9 and 3 OCRST 10 and 3 FAULT 11 and 3 RCL 12 and 3 STO 13 and 3 4 29 4 25 OUTPUT BOARD TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES Overall troubleshooting procedures for an output board are given in Figure 4 9 This flow chart is used when a fault has already been isolated to a particular output board using the board isolation procedures see paragraph 414 The procedures of Figure 4 9 will isolate the problem to a component s on the defective output board or will
227. put 1 amp 2 80W Board Schematic Diagram sheet 1 of 4 K OV DAC 0 TO 10V DAC 0 TO 10V CV DAC 0 TO 10V 15U e 3 2 3 z 2 3 2 6 22 UNREG BIAS R308 HS6 gt 50 PETER CR301 BENSON LM317T R307 I 0 WNN gt 150 A 0 CR303 1 R309 P301 2 bee c AM R301 C302 C307 C312 C309 P301 3 4 7k R306 R310 7 CR304 x 200 1 715 1 57 1 2 61K 1 1 2 500 500 350 359 500 359 35U HP34 C215 R300 C301 5505 C313 2305 E506 C208 C314 R311 CZ10 z Iu Ve 7 MT Tw hi 250V 509 HS343 897 HS Huic De NOTE vw WV rH i R304 R316 THEY MAY j R312 R317 A 121 A 5x SINK A 112 Tj 9301 1744 LATER 2 0505 R314 4 o Hr a 4 ANN 7V LM337T LM337T 0 R313 gt 15 ov DAC TO 10U Sgt GE 0 SHUNT AMP 1 3 m DC0 2 1 5 6545 QUT ENABLE 0 Iu HV0699 0070 V REF 1 1 4 POV DISABLE 3 16M MED RAIL R358 R357 R356 4 825K 15K 1 5M 10 5 9 75K 50 50 50 50 50 950 50 9 50 50 50 50 HU0698 4539 1 rS Err 407577 1 4 402K G ask 1x R359 R361 your TERM U REF 1 19K 1x
228. r To eliminate output current measurement error caused by voltage drops in the leads and connections connect the current monitoring resistor between the V and the load as a four terminal device Figure 3 2 shows the connections Connect the current monitoring leads inside the load lead connections directly at the monitoring points on the resistor element 3 9 GPIB Controller Most performance tests can be performed using only the front panel keypad however an GPIB controller is required to perform the voltage and current programming accuracy and readback accuracy tests The test procedures are written assuming that you know how to program the supply remotely from an GPIB controller or locally using the control keys and indicators on the supply s front panel Complete instructions on remote and local programming are given in the Operating M anual NOTE In the test programs that follow the brackets lt gt indicate a number to be sent The lt ch gt specifies the output channd number from 1 through 4 The voltage and current values which are sent to the specified output channel are given in Tables 3 2 and 3 3 Figure 3 2 Current Monitoring Resistor Setup 3 10 Constant Voltage CV Tests 3 11 CV Setup If more than one meter or a meter and an oscilloscope are used connect each to the 5 and 5 terminals by a separate pair of leads to avoid mutual coupling effects Connect only to 5 and because the unit regulates th
229. r source negative edge Figure 4 10 Sheet 1 Low Voltage Output Board Waveforms During Self Exercise Routine 4 37 z Main 2 00 ms Div Ext Main 2 00ms DN CL DAC U315B 7 OV DAC U315 8 Main 55 us Div SAR o En I Typical Data Line U312 pins 12 18 17 shown J Signal Comparator Output U324 7 Ch 1 00 VON CH1 0 5V Div 3 D Ch1 co 200 ns Div 4 MHz Resonator 10312 51 L Analog Multiplexer Address Line 0323 16 NOTE The waveforms are all referenced to Weommon The Readback Signal Comparator output U324 7 was used as the trigger source negative edge Figure 4 10 Sheet 2 Low Voltage Output Board Waveforms During Self Exercise Routine 4 38 Chi 2 00 B Ch1z2 00V Div 3 0 22 AE Ext MT Ext n Main 2 00 ms Div Main 2 00 ms Div i i i i B a de 3 Sen A 2 i CV DAC U315 1 Readback DAC 0315 14 CV DAC Buffer 0352 7 Ch1 10 0 V Div Ch2 10 0V Div Ext Main 2 00 ms Div D Differential Amplifier U352 1 Chi 2 00 Toggle Signal on C408 FET Downprogrammer 0342 Gate NOTE The waveforms are all referenced The Readback Signal Comparator output 1324 7 was used as the trigger source negative edge Figure 4 11 Sheet 1 High Voltage Output Board Waveforms During Self Exercise Routine 4 39
230. rating Manual Message ERR key SYNTAX ERROR NUMBER RANGE NO QUERY DISP LENGTH BUFFER FULL Hardware Errors EEPROM ERROR HARDWARE ERR HDW ERR CH 1 HDW ERR CH 2 HDW ERR CH 3 HDW ERR CH 4 NO MODEL NUM UNCALIBRATED SKIP SLF TST Errors that can occur while attempting calibration CAL ERROR Table 4 5 ERROR Codes and Messages continued Error Code ERR query Explanation and Remedy You sent a command with improper syntax Check the syntax of your com mand see Section V in the Operating Manual An out of range number was sent Send a new number within the accep table range If the error occurs again the output may require calibration See Appendix A in the Operating Manual The computer addressed the supply to talk but it did not first request data Send query first then address supply to talk Quoted string in the DSP command exceeds the display length of 12 characters May occur if too many characters are sent Error code 4 or 5 is more likely to occur for the condition The EEPROM U221 on the GPIB board is not responding correctly to pro gramming commands Try recalibrating see Appendix A in Operating Manual If calibration doesn t work troubleshoot the GPIB board see paragraph 4 18 An error has occurred on output The problem may be on the GPIB or the output board This error only occurs if the SKIP SELF TEST jumper is installed and the chan
231. re 4 14 Sheet 1 Output Held Low Troubleshooting Flow Chart 4 44 CHECK THAT THE VOLTAGE RCROSS EACH RESISTOR R379 R38 AND AND R381 IS 1 2v CHECK THE CURRENT THROUGH R428 BY COMPARING THE VOLTAGE ACROSS R428 WITH THE LISTING BELOW TYPICAL VOLTAGE NO LORD OUTPUT R428 ON OUTPUT 4GWLV 8 74V 4QWHV 0 41 B KLV 1 4 8 81V CR348 CONDUCTING CHECK U3S2B CHECK FOR LEAKY CR354 2350 6 VOLTAGE SHOULD BE 14 0335 CHECK 0347 CHECK FOR LEAKY CR353 CHECK U3SeR CHECK U346 INPUTS CHECK R488 CHECK U341D U340B ON 40 Q321 U341D U34 B U34 1B 0325 ON B N CHECK U346 CHECK FOR LEAKY CR350 Figure 4 14 Sheet 2 Output Held Low Troubleshooting Flow Chart 4 45 ON 4QW BORRDS CHECK VOLTAGE FROM C366 U338 PIN 8 ON B N BOARDS CHECK VOLTAGE FROM C388 TO V OUTPUT TERMINAL CHECK FOR OPEN CR32S CHECK POWER MODULE U338 ON 494 U338 AND 4338 ON 4V 4GW _ OR Bs 4 VCBOW 7 MERSURE THE CURRENT THROUGH CR325 BY PUTTING AN AMMETER aoe CR325 WHICH SHORTS THE CHECK US4 D CHECK U336 ON 494 OUTPUTS OR 6325 0323 ON 884 OUTPUTS CHECK FOR OPEN U337 OR us4en Figure 4 14 Sheet 3 Output Held Low Troubleshooting Flow Chart 4 46 WARNING WITH R498 OR RSQ LIFTED AND THE SUPPLY TURNED ON HIGH OUTPUT VOLTAGE MAY BE PRESENT EVEN IF THE OUTPUT IS NOT PROGRAMMED UP AS PER FIG 4 13 TO ZERO OR TO VALLE THAT
232. re used in connect switch when active and a disconnect switch conjunction with the logic symbols function tables and when inactive truth tables used in this section G Gate AND Identifies an input having an AND relationship with other inputs or outputs having the same identifier number or symbol M Mode Identifies an input that selects the mode of High The more positive algebraic value operation and indicates which inputs and outputs depend on that mode Low The more negative algebraic value Negate Identifies an input that when active The level of Q output before steady state input complements other inputs or outputs and identifies which inputs and outputs are affected The level of Q output before control signal transition R Reset When active causes a flip flop to reset Transition from low to high S Set When active causes a flip flop to reset Identifies an input having an OR relationship with Transition from high to low other inputs or outputs having the same identifier number or symbol _ Bidirectional signal flow X Transmission Identifies an input that makes or breaks bidirectional connections between affected Internal Connection Connection between wo input output ports j circuit areas with a device Z Interconnection Identifies a point that is internally connected to another input output internal input or internal output having the same identif
233. rewdriver 4 4 Top Cover Removal The top cover must be removed to gain access to the assemblies inside the supply To remove the cover proceed as follows a Remove the four screws which hold the carrying straps 4 2 b Spread the bottom rear of the cover slightly and pull back to disengage it from the front panel c Remove the top cover Note that you can use the top cover assembly as a support when you open the top chassis in the next procedure 4 5 Gaining Access to Assemblies in the Supply As shown in Figure 4 1 each power supply model contains an GPIB board and at least two output boards The output boards are mounted on an upper chassis assembly and in the lower section of the main chassis The upper chassis assembly is hinged and its output boards are mounted with the components facing down The output board s in the main chassis are mounted with the components facing up To gain access to the output boards the GPIB board power transformer and other components inside the supply proceed as follows a Remove four screws located on top of the chassis near the front b Remove three screws from top left side and two screws from rear which hold the upper chassis to the main chassis Open the hinged upper chassis by lifting it from the left side This will give you access to the components on the output board s mounted in the hinged upper chassis as well as those mounted in the lower main chassis Be sure to a
234. rom input 1 Common pin 4 to input 3 V READBACK pin 6 resulting in the waveforms shown in Figures 4 10G and 4 11G Note that if there is a problem preventing the output voltage from programming up and down properly or if the differential amplifier providing the VOLTAGE READBACK signal is defective this waveform will not be correct Figures 4 10C and 411C show the output voltage waveform assuming that the control loop and power mesh are working properly BIRS SUPPLY VOLTAGES AND CURRENTS VOLTAGES THROUGH R387 R313 R314 A 15V Sema 42mA 198mA 40H 38A B N 66a CHECK THAT THE SV 15V AND 7V BIAS VOLTAGES ARE WITHIN THE RANGE SPECIFIED HERE SEE TABLE 4 16 CHECK THAT THE HIGH MEDIUM AND LOW RAIL VOLTAGES ARE CORRECT SEE TABLE 4 17 18v RT NOMINAL LINE NO LORD AND WITH RESPECT TO OUTPUT BOFRD Y CHECK INPUT RECTIFIERS CAPS FUSES CABLE P3 2 2 GND CHECK CABLE TO GPIB BOARD IF CABLE OK CHECK 028 ON GPIB BOARD SEE FIGURE 4 13 SEE FIGURE 4 16 Figure 4 9 Sheet 1 Output Board Troubleshooting 4 31 MERSURE THE BIAS TRIP VOLTAGE USE SCOPE CHECK PCLR SIGNAL RT U3le e8 CYCLE POWER AND OBSERVE THAT AT POWER ON IS HELD LOW FOR ABOUT 8 5 TO SECOND RND THEN STEPS TO ABOUT V CONNECT A JUMPER BETWEEN P3 2 1 AND P3B2 2 AND OBSERVE PLLSES 1312 21 AND SCOPE CLOCK SIGNAL RT U312 4 AND
235. rvoltage circuit can still operate In the self exercise routine microcomputer 312 repetitively programs each of the DAC s U313 12 bit DAC U314 both 8 bit DAC s in this dual DAC and U321 12 bit DAC Each DAC is programmed from zero to full output approximately 10 V This is accomplished by starting with the LSB and turning on each successive bit leaving the previous bits on until all bits including the MSB are on The DAC output is programmed back to zero in the same manner also starting with the LSB Table 4 15 lists the signals that should be present on pins 1 through 28 of U312 during the self exercise routine Figures 4 10 and 4 11 illustrate waveforms that should be observed at various points on the output board during the self exercise routine Figure 4 10 illustrates the waveforms for the low voltage 40WLV and 80WLV output boards Figure 4 11 illustrates the waveforms for the high voltage 40W HV and 80WHV output boards The waveforms shown on these figures are referenced in the troubleshooting procedures of Figure 4 9 Figures 4 10A and 4 11A show what the output of the CV DAC U315 pin 1 and Readback DAC U315 pin 14 should look like 12 steps total in waveform Figures 4 10H and 4 11H show what the output of the CC DAC U315 pin 7 and the OV DAC U315 pin 8 should look like 8 steps total The analog multiplexer U 323 is also partially exercised It is repeatedly programmed to switch its output pin 8 f
236. s that can be performed via the GPIB can also be performed from the supply s front panel In addition to the ON OFF switch already mentioned the front panel contains an LCD display and a keypad The LCD display consists of an alphanumeric display and status annunciators The LCD normally displays the measured output voltage and current of the selected output When programming an output from the front panel keypad the selected output channel the function being programmed and the present value will be displayed The annundators indicate which output channel has been selected and give GPIB power supply status information The keypad allows control of the supply s system functions as well as individual control of each output channel Detailed instructions on using the front panel s display and keypad are given in the Operating Manual 2 6 Output Boards Each power supply model contains two or more up to four output boards The output combinations that correspond to each model are shown in Figure 2 1 Each isolated output can supply power in two ranges as shown in Figure 2 2 This flexibility allows you to use the same output to power loads with different voltage and current requirements The output ranges and operating characteristics of each output are described in greater detail in Section IV of the Operating Manual As shown in Figure 2 1 each output board contains a rectifier filter power module control circuit secondary interface
237. similar to Figures 6 3 and 6 4 and cover all 80W output board types Differences between the types are indicated on the schematic 6 3 COMPONENT LOCATION ILLUSTRATIONS 6 4 The component location diagrams show the physical location of parts mounted on each assembly MODEL 6621 TRANSFORMER T1 CONNECTIONS REAR VIEW wie P O 814 BOTTOM VIEW TOP VIEW P O W14 7 WHT WHT WHT WHT RED VI FOR CABLE PART NUMBERS REFER TO CHASSIS CABLE LISTING IN TABLE 5 S Wie P70 H14 WHT WHT WHTZ WTZ WHT VIO YEL RED BRN Wil WHT WHT WHT WHT WHT VIO YEL RED BRN MODEL 6622 TRANSFORMER T1 CONNECTIONS WHT VIO YEL RED BRN WHT VIO YEL RED BRN 6 2 BRN RED YEL TOP VIEW W13 VIO WHT FOR CABLE PART NUMBERS REFER TO CHASSIS CABLE LISTING IN TABLE 5 5 0 W14 MODEL 6623R TRANSFORMER T1 CONNECTIONS REAR VIEW TU EL Er BL WHT ORN WHT BL WIS Wii P O WHTZVIO WHTZYEL 25 HS o o BGTTOM VIEW WHT WHT WHT WHT WHT VIO YEL RED BRN mis WHT VIO VEL RED BRN MODEL 6624R AND 6627 M TRANSFORMER T1 CONNECTIONS REAR VIEW P O WIS P O W12 BRN RED BOTTOM VIEW wiet WHT WHT WHT WHT WHT VIO YEL RED BRN WHT VIO YEL RED BRN N13 WHT WHT WHT WHT WHT TOP VIEW P70 W13 Wie
238. structure is shown as C4 in Figure 5 2 sheet 1 in the Operating Manual The response to the VMUX command is SZD DDD see Table 5 2 in the Operating Manual for an explanation of these abbreviations The resolution of the returned voltage reading is approximately 2 mV The analog multiplexer circuit is shown the functional schematic of Figure 6 3 Sheet 1 and on the block diagram of Figure 2 4 The eight input signals to the analog multiplexer 0323 are shown in table below The VMUX command reads back approximately 1 01 times the voltage that appears on the selected input Its readback range is limited to approximately 0 1 to 10 corresponding to 0 1 V to 10 V on the input pins However any positive voltage from approximately 0 1 V to 10 V on the input pins will readback about 0 1 V After the VMUX command is processed the selected input will remain connected to the multiplexer output U323 pin 8 as long as no othe A D conversions voltage measurements take place due to readback either over the GPIB or internally to the front panel The A D conversions on a particular output channd can be stopped by using the front panel OUTPUT SELECT key to monitor a different output channel or alternatively simply pressing the front panel VSET ISET etc keys will stop the internal A D conversions For example if it is desired to measure the multiplexer output voltage with an external voltmeter when the CV REF signal Inpu
239. t Desig Agilent Part Description Mfg Mfg No Code Part No C201 205 0160 4835 FXD CER 0 1uf 10 50VDC 28480 C206 0180 0374 FXD ELECT 10uf 10 20VDC TAN 56289 150D106X9020B2 C207 212 0160 4835 FXD CER 0 luf 10 50VDC 28480 C213 0160 4834 FXD CER 0 047uf 10 100VDC 28480 C214 0160 4808 FXD CER 470pf 576 100VDC 28480 C215 0180 0405 FXD ELECT 1 8uf 10 20VDC 56289 150D185X9020A2 C216 0160 4835 FXD CER 0 1uf 10 50VDC 28480 C217 218 0160 4807 FXD CER 33pF 100V 5 28480 C219 220 0160 4835 FXD CER 0 1uf 10 50VDC 28480 C221 0160 4834 FXD CER 0 047uf 10 100VDC 28480 C222 0180 3798 FXD ELECT 4700uF 10 25VDC 28480 223 225 0160 4835 FXD CER 0 1uf 100 50VDC 28480 CR201 205 1901 0731 DIO PWR RECT 400V 1A 80795 1N4004G F201 2110 0712 FUSE 4A 125V 28480 J201 1252 0268 CONNECTOR FEMALE 24 CONT 28480 J202 1200 0607 IC SOCKET 16 CONT REF W202 28480 1203 1200 0940 SOCKET STRIP 8 28480 P201 1251 5240 CONN POST TYPE HDR 20 CONT 28480 P202 203 1251 8105 CONK POST TYPE HDR 16 CONT 28480 P204 1252 0761 CONN POST TYPE HDR 2 CONT 28480 P205 208 1252 2493 CONN POST TYPE HDR 4 CONT 28480 P209 1252 1152 CONN 28480 Q201 1853 0099 TRANSISTOR PNP SI 28480 R201 203 0757 0438 FXD FILM 5 11K 1 1 8W 24546 CT4 1 8 TO 5111F R204 0698 0083 FXD FILM 1 96K 1 1 8W 24546 CT4 1 8 TO 1961 R205 0757 0427 FILM 1 5K 1 1 8W 24546 CT4 1 8 TO 1501F R206 0757 0438 FXD FILM 5 11K 1 1 8W 24546 CT4 1 8 TO 5111F R207 0757 0459 FXD FILM 56 2K
240. t delayed until input returns to its initial state Three State Output Indicates outputs that can have a high impedance disconnect state in addition to the normal binary logic states Bithreshold Input Input characterized by hysteresis one threshold for positive going signals and a different threshold for negative going signals Greater Than Input or Output of a magnitude comparator Less Than Input or Output of a magnitude comparator Equal Input or Output Of a magnitude comparator Extension Input or Extender Output Connected between devices to extend the number of inputs Multiplier Input Analog input used to control a variable characteristic of a function e g range Content Indicates the value of an input or output when active Binary Grouping m is highest power of 2 Input Line Grouping Two or more terminals implement a single logic input Figure A 3 Input and Output Indicators A 3 Contiguous Blocks Two symbols may share common boundary parallel or perpendicular to the direction of signal flow Note that in the example shown in Figure A 4 there 15 generally no logic connection across a horizontal line but NO LOGIC CONNECTION there is always an implied logic connection cross a vertical line Notable exceptions to this rule are the horizontal lines beneath control blocks and between sections of shift registers and counters LOGIC CONNECTION Figure A 4
241. t No 6 on output channel 2 is selected stop the A D conversions by pressing the VSET button on the front panel Next use the following program to select input 6 on channel 2 and to display the value read back to the computer 10 OUTPUT 705 VM UX 2 6 20 ENTER 705 A 30 DISPA 40 END After the program is run a voltmeter can be used to confirm that the multiplexer output 323 pin 8 and input 6 U323 pin 11 measure the same voltage and that the VMUX result is valid 2 mV 0 to 10mV good 75V to 9 V blown 0 to 10 V Oto 10 V Oto 10 V Oto 10 V Oto 10 V Oto 10 V The next program uses FOR NEXT loop to read the 8 analog multiplexer inputs one at a time The readings and associated input nos are printed by the computer see Input and Response columns in the table below 10 FOR X 1 TO 8 20 OUT 705 VMUX 2 X 30 ENTER 705 V 40 PRINT X V 50 NEXT X 60 END The table below shows the 8 measured input voltage values as well as the VMUX response for a typical calibrated 40WLV output no load connected whose voltage and current have been programmed to their High Range Full Scalue values 20V and 2A and the OV overvoltage to 23 VMUX Response If all of the inputs read back by the VMUX command are incorrect the analog multiplexer U323 and or the readback circuitry U321 U324 is probably defective If only one input is incorrect the cir
242. t repairable to the component level so a parts lists is not provided Signature analysis repair is not available for the surface mount GPIB assembly This board has a 4 position switch on it located next to U206 that replaces the function of connector P201 described on page 4 8 of this manual The switch selects the following functions Switch 1 the model function ON selects models 6621A 6622A 6623A 6624A and 6627A OFF selects models 6625A 6626A 6628A and 6629A As shipped position ON Switch 2 selects calibration lockout ON locks out front panel calibration OFF enables front panel calibration As shipped position OFF Switch 3 selects skip self test ON skips self test at turn on OFF enables self test at turn on As shipped position OFF Switch 4 not used Figure 6 2 GPIB Board Component Location
243. ta bus lines D2 D7 are fed directly to the front panel display to indicate power supply conditions The LCD display may indicate the output voltage and current for a 2 5 selected output board the present function being programmed a programmed message or an error message The annunciators provide operating and status information The microprocessor uses the real time clock to determine when to update refresh the display Data bus lines 00 02 are fed to the 3 to 8 line keyboard decoder U211 The microprocessor successively drives each of the eight open collector outputs of the decoder and monitors the four readback lines from the keyboard to determine which key was pressed The readback lines are held high until a depressed key pulls the line low 2 22 Data Buffers These 3 state buffers place the keyboard readback data on data bus lines D4 D7 when chip select CS4 is decoded As stated above the microprocessor will use this information to determine which key was pressed In addition to the keyboard readback data 04 07 the front panel data buffers provide the following data on bus lines DO D3 when CSA is decoded DO A logic 1 jumper W201 is not installed in the Skip Self Test position tells the microprocessor to perform the self test at power on or a logic 0 Jumper W201 is installed in the Skip Self Test position tells the microprocessor not to perform self test at power on A logic 1 jumper W201 is not installed in th
244. tely the Low Range Full Scale current value see Table 3 2 of the output under test For example if the Low Range Full Scale current value is 2 A set the external supply s current limit to about 3A c Turn on the supply and select the output to be tested OUTPUT SELECT key on thefront pand d Program the selected output channel to OV by sending the string VSET ch gt 0 e Multiply the voltage drop across the current monitoring resistor by 10 to obtain the current sink value Is in amps and record the value Record also the current reading on the display The readings should be within the limits specified below for the particular output type being tested Note that the CC annunciator must be on Neg Current Limit Low Range Output V Display Accuracy Front Panel LCD Output 15 DVM Reading X 10 40WLV 5 35 to 5 85 15 42 80WLV 10 7to 117A 15 78 mA 40WH V 2 15 to 2 35A Is 13 5 mA 80WHV 43to47A 15 30 mA f Read back the sink current from the selected channel over the GPIB by entering and running the program listed in step e of paragraph 3 23 g Record the value displayed on the controller This value should be within the reading Is noted in step e and the limits specified below Output Readback Accuracy Controller Display 40WLV 15 37 mA 80WLV 15 73 40WHV Is 13 rnA 80WHV 15 29 5 mA h Raise the voltage of the external supply up to approximately 12 V 40WLV or 80WLV outputs or to 26 V
245. ters The 2 K static RAM stores variables voltage to be programmed output current readback etc A third memory chip shown in the output boards interface block of Figure 2 3 is the EEPROM electrically erasable pro grammable memory The EEPROM U221 stores all of the system constants including calibration constants the supply s GPIB address and model number see paragraph 2 19 2 15 Real Time Clock The real time clock U209 consists of a 14 stage ripple counter that divides the 1 MHz Q dock signal from the microprocessor to produce a pulse every 4 milliseconds The real time clock is used by the microprocessor to schedule regular jobs as described previously The TIMER ENABLE signal resets the counter to zero 2 16 Output Boards Interface This circuit provides the interface between the system microcomputer and each of the output boards up to 4 in the power supply Data is transferred serially one bit at a time between latches buffers on the GPIB board and opto isolators on the output boards As shown in Figure 2 3 the latches buffers use data bus lines 00 03 to send receive data from the applicable output Data Line DO is used for output board 1 D1 for output board 2 D2 for output board 3 if present and D3 for output board 4 if present A controlled and regulated 5 volt line is also generated on the GPIB board to operate part of the opto isolators on the output boards In addition to interfacing with the output boards the
246. the fault is with the supply itself and not with an associated circuit load or power line The verification tests described in Section III enable this to be determined without having to remove the covers from the supply The most important aspect of troubleshooting is the formulation of a logical approach to locating the source of trouble good understanding of the principles of operation is particularly helpful and it is recommended that Section II of this manual as well as the Operating Manual Agilent Part No 9557 6377 be reviewed before attempting to troubleshoot the unit If a component is found to be defective replace it and re conduct the performance tests given in Section III of this manual When the GPIB board or the EEPROM U221 IC on the GPIB board is replaced each output present in the supply must first be recalibrated as described in Appendix A of the operating Manual If an Output board is replaced the associated output channel must be recalibrated If a component in the output circuits or readback circuits on an output board is replaced the output must be calibrated before you can reconduct the performance tests Section V in this manual lists all of the replaceable parts for the power supply 4 2 ELECTROSTATIC PROTECTION This instrument uses components which can be damaged by static charge M ost semiconductors can suffer serious performance degradation as a result of 4 1 static charge even though complete
247. tom horizontal line Using Channel B on the oscilloscope set the volts division switch to 50 mV div dc coupled and position the trace on the bottom horizontal line Program the output voltage in a loop which alternately programs the output voltage between 0 and the High Range Full Scale Voltage value by running the program listed below Refer to Table 3 3 for the High Range Full Scale Voltage value for the particular output being tested 10 OUT 705 VSET ch gt 0 20 WAIT 0 05 30 OUT 705 VSET ch gt High RangeF S Voltage gt 40 WAIT 0 05 50 GOTO 10 60 END NOTE The tested output s CV annunciator should remain on at all times whilethetest is in progress Observe Channel A on the oscilloscope and adjust for stationary waveform by using Channel A as the trigger source set to trigger on a negative edge Be sure to trigger as dose as possible to the time when the output voltage just begins to fall On Channd A observe the output voltage transition from the High Range Full Scale Voltage to the scope s bottom horizontal line Look for a smooth exponential waveform with no kinks or aberrations Perform a time contstant check by insuring that the output voltage falls to about 3796 of the High Range Full Scale in less than 250 usec 40WLV 80WLV outputs or 750 usec 40WHV 80WHV outputs Refer to the Channel A waveform shown in Figure 3 5 h Now observe Channel the oscilloscope while maintainin
248. uit 2 8 GPIB Interface These circuits consist of the GPIB bus connector J201 transceivers U 203 for the 8 data lines and 8 control lines and the GPIB talker listener chip U202 GPIB IEEE 488 functions are implemented by the GPIB chip which handles data transfer between the microprocessor and the GPIB handshake protocol and talker listener addressing procedures The GPIB talker listener chip is connected to the data bus and appears as memory locations to the microprocessor The eight data lines 0101 0108 of the GPIB are reserved for for the transfer of data and other messages in a byte serial bit parallel manner Data and message transfer is asynchronous coordinated by the three handshake lines DAV NRFD and NDAC The power supply can be a talker or a listener on the GPIB The controller dictates the role of an GPIB device by setting the ATN attention line true and sending talk or listen addresses on the data lines 0101 0108 The power supply s GPIB address is stored the EEPROM electrically erasable programmable memory chip along with other system variables You can find out your supply s GPIB address by using the front panel ADDR key as described in the operating manual As shipped from the factory the power supply s address is set to 5 Any address from 0 through 30 is a valid address There are five GPIB control lines ATN IFC REN SRQ and EOI IEEE 488 When the controller sets the ATN line true
249. um rail turn on comparator and bias trip low line comparator apparently at random or at U325 If there is an intermittent power transformer connection to the medium rail low line or a blown medium rail fuse a voltage doubler action will take place which will make the medium rail sag at heavy load but will appear normal at light and no load In this case the medium rail ripple frequency will equal the line frequency instead of being twice the line frequency as is normal Check medium rail fuses F300 F301 F305 F306 on 40 W boards and F305 F306 on 80 W boards displayed Check for proper fan operation Check that the power module s are screwed down tightly to the heatsink Check voltage on U327 14 against Table 4 16 see paragraph 4 30 Check R355 If the over temperature condition occurs rapidly after application of output load power module s U338 U339 may be defective Check for shorted capacitor s from power module s pin 5 to common Check for open CR327 Check power module s U338 U339 Fuse F303 in the output return line blows after being replaced 4 56 STATUS DECODING STATUS INPUTS STATUS SELECT CV LOOP CL LOOP CL LOOP OV SENSE THERM LOW MEDIUM x HIGH CVO LOW ANNUNCIATOR LOW LOW HIGH HIGH LOW MODE CC ANNUNCIATOR CLO LOW MODE CC ANNUNCIATOR RESULT
250. um rail voltage is also monitored to ensure that it is above the minimum level required for proper operation of the power module When these two conditions are met the BIAS TRIP line is allowed to go high approximately 0 7 V Then after a delay of approximately 0 3 seconds provided by an external delay capacitor C346 the PCLR signal goes high allowing the microcomputer to complete its itialization routine and set the OUTPUT ENABLE line low This allows ON OFF signal to go high 2V enabling the control circuit and current sources which allow power to reach the output terminals Notethat whenever the OUTPUT ENABLE signal aR ASI 4 5 5 SSS rr AG ml 3780510 Add 35015853405 NO NANL Sora 518 5918 s g EUST 752 20123130 AL 5 4 53178675 lt 399100240 Sula an LESES 339 9500 0 id am gaen eeen NSI lt 13538 01415 1 133135 501815 A ul Eg Sum T T opVW q sN 25035 AQ 10 38 4 NOISY D 255 EG O d BIEN snigs gt rs 8007 D om gt doo AD oo AJ 50 1 05530059 UNDIS 2267 42402 0 ARA
251. up Use the test setup described in paragraph 4 23 Connect jumper pack W202 in the normal operating position and set up the signature analyzer as shown below Signature Analyzer P201 PIN Input i Connection START 11 STOP 12 CLOCK 18 GND 4 Measurements Use the data probe to take signature for each circuit at the input and output pins listed below Do not press any front panel keys Circuit Signature Output Signature 5V P201 1 3U9F U214 2 U214 18 3U9F FRONT PANEL U214 6 U214 14 3U9F INTERFACE U214 8 U214 12 0000 DATA BUFFERS 0214 11 3U9F U214 9 3U9F U214 U214 13 U214 7 3U9F U214 15 U214 5 3U9F U214 17 U214 3 3U9F 3U9F U214 4 3U9F U214 16 3U9F 3U9F 0000 Note The output of U210 to keyboard is not tested during S A Errors in input signatures to U214 may be caused by U210 4 26 Table 4 13 GPIB Board S A Test No 8 Description This test checks the operation of each key on the front panel Test Setup Use the test setup described in paragraph 4 23 Connect jumper pack W202 in the normal operating position and set up the signature analyzer as shown below Signature Analyzer P201 PIN Input i Connection START 11 STOP 12 CLOCK 18 GND 4 Measurements Use the data probe to take signatures for each key at the input and output pins listed below The appropriate key must be pressed and held while the signatures are measured at the specified pins The 5V signature for this test is 3U9F The signal path for each
252. void any cable snag when opening the hinged chassis Place the removed top cover assembly under the opened upper chassis for support o 4 6 GPIB Board Removal Looking at the unit from the front the GPIB board is located on the right side with its components facing to the left Most of the components are accessible for test purposes without removing the board from the unit However for easy access it is best to remove the board from the unit To remove the GPIB board proceed as follows a Disconnect all cables Note the routing of cables if they have to be removed since their position may affect the supply s ripple performance b Remove two hex standoffs from rear which secure the GPIB connector to the chassis Retain the lock or flat washers for reassembly c Remove one ground screw from the top front of the GPIB board Retain lock or flat washers for reassembly d Slide board forward approximately 1 4 inch to disengage the keyed standoffs Lift board out of chassis 4 7 40 Watt output hoard Removal Model 6623A has two 40 Watt Output boards located in the main chassis and Models 6624A and 6627A have four 40 Watt Output boards two boards are mounted in the upper chassis assembly and two are mounted in the main chassis To remove a 40 Watt Output boards proceed as follows 6623A 6624A AND 6627A TWO 494 BOARDS LOWER CHASSIS FOUR OUTPUT BOARDS ONE S N BOARD UPPER CHASSIS TWO IN LOWER CHASSIS TWO IN
253. well as the constants used in calibrating the supply The EEPROM U221 is non volatile allowing it to retain the stored information after power is cycled off and on Because the RAM operates faster than the EEPROM at power on the stored serial data is read into RAM in the system microcomputer via data bus line D7 the associated buffer state and the data output pin of the EEPROM The EEPROM s 1024 bits of read write memory are divided into 64 registers of 16 bits each Each register can be serially read from or written to using data bus line D7 Input data is received via a data latch and output data is sent via a data buffer Data written to the EEPROM is stored in a location until it is updated by an erase and write The CHIP SELECT and CLOCK signals are used by the microprocessor to control the EEPROM s programming modes At power on the EEPON signal holds the EEPROM s CLOCK signal off to protect against accidental data writes when power is initially applied 2 20 Front Panel Interface These circuits provide the interface between the supply s system microcomputer and the front panel keyboard and LCD display The microprocessor uses the data latches U210 and data buffers U214 to transfer data between the supply s system microcomputer and the front panel 2 21 Data Latches On the rising edge of the CS5 chip select these D type flip flops will be set to the logic states that are present on the data bus lines Da
254. zero volts represents the bleed current in Q341 2 47 Overvoltage Protection Circuits These circuits generate the OV GATE signal which fires the SCR in the power module and shuts down the output Figure 2 9 is a simplified schematic of the overvoltage protection circuits which are comprised mainly of a fixed overvoltage sensing circuit U354 signal processor U 327 diodes CR356 CR360 and pulse transformer T301 that couples the remote trip signals that are sent received via the and OV terminals As shown in Figure 2 9 the main input to the overvoltage protection circuits is the OV DRIVE signal which is received from the overvoltage detector P O U327 see paragraph 2 32 The OV DRIVE signal goes high to activate the OV GATE signal which is sent via diode CR357 to fire the SCR in the power module The conditions which activate OV DRIVE are described in the following paragraphs 51 5V 22 2V I 1 I I i 1 2 06 3 75A 5 15 8244 2 40W LOW VOLTAGE OUTPUT 40W HIGH VOLTAGE OUTPUT 51 5V 22 2V 80W LOW VOLTAGE OUTPUT 8 W HIGH VOLTAGE OUTPUT V HIGH QUADRANT 2 QUADRANT 1 HIGH e LU L J LOW F 5 QUADRANT 3 QUADRANT 4 BOTH LOW RANGES RANGE SV 0 LOW HIGH QUADRANT 1 CV OR CC OPERATION OUTPUT QUADRANT 2 CURRENT SINK OPERATION CV CC QUADRANT 1 RANGES QUADRANT 4 REVERSE DIODE CHARACTERISTIC Figure

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

GUÍA DEL USUARIO DE SOFTWARE P-touch P700  Dron avanzado con cámara termográfica para caza  GNC-0111 User Manual  Manuale utente - Reporter Fiab Srl  STR-DA1ES/DB780  LC-004-012 User Manual LED DALI PWM Dimmer DW.indd  Eaton Evolution 1150 Rack  Utilizzo del driver per stampante Brother MFC-9180  Sierra M6-1 User Manual  Sistema de inyección Hilti HIT  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file